<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Admin</id>
	<title>Spiffy Stores Knowledge Base - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Admin"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/Special:Contributions/Admin"/>
	<updated>2026-11-10T10:37:54Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.46.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10320</id>
		<title>Antiqua Theme Changelog</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10320"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T07:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Add a Further Reference section cross-referencing the Antiqua theme pages&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page lists updates, bug fixes and enhancements to the Antiqua theme. Earlier update details are not available, as this page was created with the release of version 13.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==8th November 2026 - Version 13.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The theme is now fully responsive. It adapts to phones, tablets and desktops, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling.&lt;br /&gt;
* The top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer on small screens, with drop-down sub-menus and a close button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Eight new colour schemes, bringing the total to 15: Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Accessibility work: a skip-to-content link, visible focus states on links and buttons, landmark regions, one H1 per page, and WCAG AA colour contrast throughout.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added support for [[Product Reviews]], including a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form on the product page, and average star ratings on product cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added related products on the product page, chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added social sharing buttons to the product page for Facebook, X, Pinterest, WhatsApp and email, plus a copy-link button. These no longer load any third-party scripts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Collection pages now display as a grid of product cards, with a product count and sorting options.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a page listing all of your collections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added breadcrumbs, and a quantity field on the product page.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Announcement&amp;quot; section in the Theme editor: a full-width bar above the header with its own text, background colour and text colour. The two colours use colour pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
* New typography settings, so the heading and body typefaces can be changed without editing the theme.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; setting. The logo keeps its own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a LinkedIn option to the footer social links. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Product page options: show or hide the vendor, product type and availability, choose which side the product image sits on, enable click-to-zoom, and start option menus on a &amp;quot;Please select&amp;quot; prompt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer account pages are now responsive, and the account, cart and logout links sit in the header as icons.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced page weight by removing unused JavaScript plugins and switching product images to responsive sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further Reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Antiqua theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ The Antiqua demo store]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_your_store%27s_footer&amp;diff=10319</id>
		<title>Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_your_store%27s_footer&amp;diff=10319"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T07:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Add a Further Reference section cross-referencing the Antiqua theme pages&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The footer runs across the bottom of every page in your store. In the Antiqua theme it has three columns - a text area on the left, a menu in the middle, and a newsletter form with your social media links on the right - followed by a row of accepted payment methods. All of it is set in the &amp;quot;Store footer&amp;quot; section of the Theme editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Left column ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a title in &amp;quot;Left Column Title&amp;quot; and your text in &amp;quot;Left Column Text&amp;quot;. This is a good place for a short paragraph about your store, your address or your trading hours. You can also use HTML in the text area, so an image or a link works here too. If you leave both fields blank the column disappears and the other columns move across to fill the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Middle column - Quick Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Footer menu&amp;quot; chooses which menu appears in the middle column. The heading above it is fixed as &amp;quot;Quick Links&amp;quot;. Menus are created in the &amp;quot;Store menus&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t select a menu, the column will be empty and you will see a gap, so either pick a menu or accept the shorter footer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Newsletter subscribe form ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The newsletter form sits on the right. Choose your provider in &amp;quot;Newsletter system&amp;quot; - MailChimp, Campaign Monitor or Mad Mimi - and paste the form&#039;s action URL into &amp;quot;Form action URL&amp;quot;. Detailed instructions for each provider are in [[Vintage theme - connecting your email subscriber form]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting &amp;quot;Newsletter system&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;None&amp;quot; hides the form entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Social media links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer shows an icon for each social media profile you enter. There are seven fields - Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, Instagram, LinkedIn, Vimeo and YouTube - and each takes the full URL of your profile, for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;https://www.facebook.com/spiffystores&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave a field blank and that icon simply doesn&#039;t appear, so you only show the networks you actually use. If every field is blank the row is hidden and no &amp;quot;Follow us&amp;quot; heading is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding a LinkedIn profile ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LinkedIn is included alongside the other networks. Paste your company or profile page URL into the &amp;quot;LinkedIn&amp;quot; field - for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;https://www.linkedin.com/company/your-company&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - and save. The icon appears at the end of the row, after Instagram. The same URL is also added to the structured data in your page&#039;s source, which helps search engines connect your store to your company page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment methods ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The row of accepted payment methods below the footer is generated from the payment methods enabled in your store, so there is nothing to configure in the theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further Reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Antiqua theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua Theme Changelog]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ The Antiqua demo store]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10318</id>
		<title>Antiqua theme - selecting &amp; modifying your colour scheme</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10318"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T07:00:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Add a Further Reference section cross-referencing the Antiqua theme pages&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Antiqua theme comes with 15 built-in colour schemes. A scheme recolours the whole store at once - the damask band across the top of every page, the menu tabs, the side menu, headings, links, prices, buttons and the product hovers - so you don&#039;t have to change anything individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your colour scheme, open the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; in your store&#039;s Toolbox and look for the &amp;quot;Colour Scheme&amp;quot; section. Choose a scheme from the drop-down, then save. You can try each one on the [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Antiqua demo store] before you commit to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;590px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Antiqua-theme-colour-schemes.png|The 15 built-in colour schemes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Scheme&lt;br /&gt;
! What it looks like&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Plum&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep plum band with pink accents. This is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Blue&lt;br /&gt;
| Mid blue band with brighter cyan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Green&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep green band with lime accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Grey&lt;br /&gt;
| Neutral charcoal band with soft grey accents. A good choice when your product photos carry the colour.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Purple&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep violet band with orchid accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Red&lt;br /&gt;
| Strong brick red band with a warmer red accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Teal&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep teal band with turquoise accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Orange&lt;br /&gt;
| Burnt orange band with terracotta accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Navy&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep navy band with royal blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive band with yellow-green accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Indigo&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep indigo band with violet accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Burgundy&lt;br /&gt;
| Dark wine red band with a deep rose accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Charcoal&lt;br /&gt;
| Near-black band with muted grey accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sand&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale warm beige band with dark brown text and tan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sky&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale blue band with dark navy text and mid blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About the pale schemes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sand and Sky are deliberately light. On these two schemes the store name, the header icons and the menu button switch from white to a dark ink so they stay readable against the pale band; the slide-out menu on phones stays dark, so it matches the rest of the theme. If you have a white or very pale logo image, those two schemes will hide it - use one of the darker schemes, or the store name as text, instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing the colours yourself ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schemes are built into the theme, so the drop-down is the supported way to change your colours. If you need something outside the 15 - your own brand colour, for example - that means editing the theme&#039;s stylesheet, which is covered in [[Customising your theme]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further Reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Antiqua theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua Theme Changelog]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ The Antiqua demo store]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10317</id>
		<title>The Antiqua theme guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10317"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T07:00:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Add a Further Reference section cross-referencing the Antiqua theme pages&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Antiqua-theme-home.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Antiqua theme is a traditional style theme for Spiffy Stores, with a clean, simple and elegant layout for your products. It adjusts for all screen sizes and devices, so your store looks right whether your customer is on a desktop, a laptop, a tablet or a phone. [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Preview the theme], and resize your browser to see it in action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theme includes 15 colour schemes: Plum, Blue, Green, Grey, Purple, Red, Teal, Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|Click here to preview the different colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On phones and tablets the top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer, collection pages become a grid of product cards, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling. The theme is built with keyboard navigation, visible focus states and WCAG AA colour contrast in mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting started - Before you start to customise your theme ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1. Create your collections ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that it&#039;s difficult to customise your store and its menus until you have created some collections for your products. Collections are a way to organise your products by grouping them into categories. You create these in the &amp;quot;Collections&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2. Add your collections to your top menu ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have created your collections, add them to your store&#039;s menus in the &amp;quot;Store menus&amp;quot; section of your Toolbox. If you don&#039;t do this, your collections will go unseen by customers visiting your store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3. Add a few products to your store ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trying to modify an empty store means that you can&#039;t preview many of the features built into the theme, such as related products, which are chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Theme Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the theme is configured in the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox, without touching any code. Each section below corresponds to a group of settings in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colour Scheme ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the 15 built-in colour schemes. The scheme changes the header band, the menu, the side menu, headings, links, buttons and prices together, so the whole store stays consistent. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store Logo ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &amp;quot;Use a logo?&amp;quot; to replace the store name in the header with an uploaded image. &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; sets how wide the logo may be; its height follows the logo&#039;s own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped, and a logo narrower than the width you choose is shown at its own size. You can also upload a favicon, which is the small image shown in the browser&#039;s address bar and bookmark menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose which menu appears across the top of your store. The menu supports drop-down sub-menus. On phones and tablets this menu collapses into a slide-out drawer with a hamburger button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Product page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product page settings let you turn on customer reviews (with a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form), star ratings on product cards, social sharing links, related products, the quantity field, and the product vendor, product type and availability lines. You can also choose which side the product image sits on and whether clicking an image opens it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Show a &#039;Please select&#039; prompt on option menus?&amp;quot; makes product option menus start on a prompt instead of pre-selecting the first option, which avoids customers accidentally adding the wrong size or colour to the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Side menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side menu can be displayed on the left or the right, or turned off entirely. You can also hide the &amp;quot;Latest news&amp;quot; section, change the side menu heading and choose which menu appears in the sidebar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collection pages ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Display sorting options?&amp;quot; lets customers re-order a collection by price, name or date, and &amp;quot;Products per page&amp;quot; sets how many products appear before the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Announcement bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The announcement bar is a full-width strip that appears above the header on every page, for a sale, a shipping notice or a phone number. Turn it on, type your text, and choose the background and text colours with the colour pickers. Leaving the text blank hides the bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Typography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a heading typeface and a body typeface. Leave either on the theme default to keep the original serif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store footer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer has a text area on the left, a menu in the middle, a newsletter form and links to your social media profiles. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further Reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua Theme Changelog]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ The Antiqua demo store]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=10316</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=10316"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T07:00:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Link the Antiqua theme guide and its pages from the Theme guides section&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you&#039;re new to Spiffy Stores, you should read our [https://www.spiffystores.com.au/getting-started-guide Getting started guide]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;columns small-12 medium-6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Getting started ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.spiffystores.com.au/getting-started-guide Getting started guide]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Toolbox login]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to Use AI in your Spiffy Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AI Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Introduction to shipping &amp;amp; handling|How does shipping work?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout &amp;amp; Payment|How do I accept payments?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Which web browser do I use?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enabling Cookies in your Web Browser|Enabling cookies in your web browser]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enabling JavaScript in your Web Browser|Enabling JavaScript in your web browser]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Spiffy Stores Themes|Editing the look &amp;amp;amp; feel of your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Submitting your store to search engines]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Locking / Hiding / Password Protecting Your Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DNS &amp;amp; Domains|How do I use my own domain name?]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing a Shopify store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Cloudflare]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Adding_new_Products|Adding new products to your store]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Product_Variations|Product variations]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Custom_Product_Options|Custom product options]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Images|Product images &amp;amp;amp; custom image sizes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Tags|Product Tags]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How store search works]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Adding_to_Collections|Adding products to collections]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Featured Products|How to create featured products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product Bundles|Creating bundles of products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bulk Product Export and Import|Importing and exporting your products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Exporting for Merchants]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bulk Product Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating Digital Downloads|Selling digital downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Providing downloadable products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Infinite Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Gift_Cards|Selling Gift Cards]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collections ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collections|Introduction to Collections]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Standard Collections]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Super Collections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blogs &amp;amp;amp; pages ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages|Introduction to blogs &amp;amp;amp; pages]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Pages|Pages]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Blogs|Blogs]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Formatting_your_content|Formatting text &amp;amp;amp; images]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Links|Adding in links]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced textile editing|Advanced textile editing]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inserting photos into pages and blog articles|Inserting photos into pages and blog articles]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the &amp;quot;more&amp;quot; tag to split blog articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Example Policy Pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preferences ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[General Preferences]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Standards &amp;amp; Formats]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Regions &amp;amp; Taxes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout &amp;amp; Payment]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout Rules]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DNS &amp;amp; Domains]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shipping &amp;amp;amp; handling ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Introduction to shipping &amp;amp; handling]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up custom shipping rates|Setting up custom shipping rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collection shipping codes and global shipping rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Australia Post Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using NZ Post Shipping|Using New Zealand Post Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Fastway Couriers Shipping|Using Fastway Couriers Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using FedEx shipping|Using FedEx Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Weight-based Shipping with Australia Post|Setting up weight based rates if you&#039;re using Australia Post]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Weight-based Shipping with Sendle|Setting up weight based rates if you&#039;re using Sendle]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding Shipping Insurance Cover to your shipping rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipping to the US under the new tariff regime]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fulfilment Services ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using a fulfilment service]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipping Products using a fulfilment service]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Australia Post Parcel Contact (formerly eParcel)]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Activating Australia Post Parcel Contract (formerly eParcel) Fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Australia Post MyPost Business]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Activating Australia Post MyPost Business Fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Sendle]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Activating Sendle Fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipping Orders with batch fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Discounts &amp;amp;amp; coupon codes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Discounts &amp;amp; Coupon Codes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shopping Cart Discounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your account ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding staff accounts|Adding and deleting staff accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Controlling staff access]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Changing a store&#039;s owner]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Account Security]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Order notifications|Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to update the credit card on your account]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to upgrade or downgrade to a different plan]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Can I use multiple currencies or multiple languages in my store?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to activate your new Spiffy Store]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to cancel your Spiffy Store]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lost_your_store_password?|Lost your password?]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Pausing your store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orders ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Order Management and Status|Order management and status]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Order Shipping and Billing Addresses|Order shipping and billing addresses]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reducing fraud in your online store|Reducing fraud]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recent Orders Data Feed|Recent orders data feed]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Abandoned Orders|Abandoned orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Downloading Your Orders|Downloading your orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Cancelling an Order|Cancelling an order]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Refunding an Order|Refunding an order]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Draft Orders|Draft Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Customers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Configuring Customer Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Information about your customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to filter your customer view and create customer groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing and exporting your customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Wholesale support for customer accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;columns small-12 medium-6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Customising your theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building a Theme for Spiffy Stores]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Spiffy Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How do Themes work?|How do themes work?]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Spiffy Stores Themes|Customising your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Global Javascript Assets|Using global Javascript assets]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Global Liquid Snippets|Using global Liquid snippets]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the Spiffy Ajax API]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Theme Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using WebDAV to edit your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Editing your email templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a custom Web Font to your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Specifying the path for image files in stylesheets]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Theme guides ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Changing to a different theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Updating your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Simple Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Adelaide ecommerce theme guide|The Adelaide Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Melbourne ecommerce theme guide|The Melbourne theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Darwin Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Darwin Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Bendigo Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Bendigo Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Sydney Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Sydney Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Vintage theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Minimal theme guide]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Showtime theme guide]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Antiqua theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Antiqua Theme Changelog]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://fresh.spiffystores.com/ Fresh theme] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://dreamtheme.spiffystores.com/ Dream theme]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Georgia theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Seattle theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using Liquid ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Tag Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Variable Reference|The variables you can use ]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Filter Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Paginate Tag|Pagination ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Collection Sorting|Sorting Products in a Collection ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing &amp;amp;amp; rendering out menus ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to create and edit your store menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Marketing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product data feeds]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Selling on Facebook]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set up Shoppable Posts on Instagram|Setting up Shoppable Posts on Instagram]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding Facebook Messenger to your store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Information for SEO Professionals]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Email Marketing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Ecommerce Affiliate Marketing &amp;amp; Referral Programs|Affiliate Marketing &amp;amp; Referral Programs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Abandoned Checkouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Back in Stock Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using Apps and Add-Ons ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Available Apps]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Infinite Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout Rules]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Abandoned Checkouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product data feeds]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reducing fraud in your online store|MaxMind Anti-fraud]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Migrating to Spiffy Stores ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[URL Redirects]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bulk Product Export and Import|Importing and exporting your products]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tutorials ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to change the title of the home page]]  &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to enable Google Analytics]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to verify your site in Google&#039;s Webmaster Tools]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to create an XML product feed]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Asking your customer for additional information]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Dreamweaver to edit your store theme]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Web Hook|Creating Web Hooks]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding comments to blog articles|Adding comments to blog articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to add a link to a page]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating custom meta tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a quantity field to your product pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Making design tweaks to your store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Getting help using TeamViewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting up your email ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[An introduction to Email]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up your email|How to set up your Spiffy Stores email]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to access your Spiffy Stores mailboxes through webmail]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to set up your email program to access your Spiffy Stores mailboxes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Microsoft Outlook]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2003]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Mozilla Thunderbird]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Microsoft Outlook Express]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Mac Mail on OSX]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Outlook 2011 on OSX]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure an Apple iPhone using IOS 14|How to configure an Apple iPhone]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure an Apple iPhone using IOS 14|How to configure an Apple iPad]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up your email#Instructions_for_using_Gmail_to_handle_your_email|Using Gmail to handle your email]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Mailbox quota warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[I can receive but can&#039;t send mail]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to reset your email password]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== API Documentation for Developers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[An Introduction to the Spiffy Stores API]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating Private API Keys]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the API]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[API Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10315</id>
		<title>Antiqua theme - selecting &amp; modifying your colour scheme</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10315"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:56:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Add a chart of the 15 colour schemes&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Antiqua theme comes with 15 built-in colour schemes. A scheme recolours the whole store at once - the damask band across the top of every page, the menu tabs, the side menu, headings, links, prices, buttons and the product hovers - so you don&#039;t have to change anything individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your colour scheme, open the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; in your store&#039;s Toolbox and look for the &amp;quot;Colour Scheme&amp;quot; section. Choose a scheme from the drop-down, then save. You can try each one on the [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Antiqua demo store] before you commit to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;590px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Antiqua-theme-colour-schemes.png|The 15 built-in colour schemes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Scheme&lt;br /&gt;
! What it looks like&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Plum&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep plum band with pink accents. This is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Blue&lt;br /&gt;
| Mid blue band with brighter cyan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Green&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep green band with lime accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Grey&lt;br /&gt;
| Neutral charcoal band with soft grey accents. A good choice when your product photos carry the colour.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Purple&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep violet band with orchid accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Red&lt;br /&gt;
| Strong brick red band with a warmer red accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Teal&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep teal band with turquoise accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Orange&lt;br /&gt;
| Burnt orange band with terracotta accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Navy&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep navy band with royal blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive band with yellow-green accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Indigo&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep indigo band with violet accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Burgundy&lt;br /&gt;
| Dark wine red band with a deep rose accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Charcoal&lt;br /&gt;
| Near-black band with muted grey accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sand&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale warm beige band with dark brown text and tan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sky&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale blue band with dark navy text and mid blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About the pale schemes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sand and Sky are deliberately light. On these two schemes the store name, the header icons and the menu button switch from white to a dark ink so they stay readable against the pale band; the slide-out menu on phones stays dark, so it matches the rest of the theme. If you have a white or very pale logo image, those two schemes will hide it - use one of the darker schemes, or the store name as text, instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing the colours yourself ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schemes are built into the theme, so the drop-down is the supported way to change your colours. If you need something outside the 15 - your own brand colour, for example - that means editing the theme&#039;s stylesheet, which is covered in [[Customising your theme]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10314</id>
		<title>The Antiqua theme guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10314"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:56:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Add a screenshot of the theme to the top of the guide&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Antiqua-theme-home.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Antiqua theme is a traditional style theme for Spiffy Stores, with a clean, simple and elegant layout for your products. It adjusts for all screen sizes and devices, so your store looks right whether your customer is on a desktop, a laptop, a tablet or a phone. [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Preview the theme], and resize your browser to see it in action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theme includes 15 colour schemes: Plum, Blue, Green, Grey, Purple, Red, Teal, Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|Click here to preview the different colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On phones and tablets the top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer, collection pages become a grid of product cards, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling. The theme is built with keyboard navigation, visible focus states and WCAG AA colour contrast in mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting started - Before you start to customise your theme ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1. Create your collections ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that it&#039;s difficult to customise your store and its menus until you have created some collections for your products. Collections are a way to organise your products by grouping them into categories. You create these in the &amp;quot;Collections&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2. Add your collections to your top menu ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have created your collections, add them to your store&#039;s menus in the &amp;quot;Store menus&amp;quot; section of your Toolbox. If you don&#039;t do this, your collections will go unseen by customers visiting your store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3. Add a few products to your store ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trying to modify an empty store means that you can&#039;t preview many of the features built into the theme, such as related products, which are chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Theme Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the theme is configured in the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox, without touching any code. Each section below corresponds to a group of settings in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colour Scheme ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the 15 built-in colour schemes. The scheme changes the header band, the menu, the side menu, headings, links, buttons and prices together, so the whole store stays consistent. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store Logo ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &amp;quot;Use a logo?&amp;quot; to replace the store name in the header with an uploaded image. &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; sets how wide the logo may be; its height follows the logo&#039;s own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped, and a logo narrower than the width you choose is shown at its own size. You can also upload a favicon, which is the small image shown in the browser&#039;s address bar and bookmark menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose which menu appears across the top of your store. The menu supports drop-down sub-menus. On phones and tablets this menu collapses into a slide-out drawer with a hamburger button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Product page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product page settings let you turn on customer reviews (with a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form), star ratings on product cards, social sharing links, related products, the quantity field, and the product vendor, product type and availability lines. You can also choose which side the product image sits on and whether clicking an image opens it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Show a &#039;Please select&#039; prompt on option menus?&amp;quot; makes product option menus start on a prompt instead of pre-selecting the first option, which avoids customers accidentally adding the wrong size or colour to the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Side menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side menu can be displayed on the left or the right, or turned off entirely. You can also hide the &amp;quot;Latest news&amp;quot; section, change the side menu heading and choose which menu appears in the sidebar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collection pages ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Display sorting options?&amp;quot; lets customers re-order a collection by price, name or date, and &amp;quot;Products per page&amp;quot; sets how many products appear before the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Announcement bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The announcement bar is a full-width strip that appears above the header on every page, for a sale, a shipping notice or a phone number. Turn it on, type your text, and choose the background and text colours with the colour pickers. Leaving the text blank hides the bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Typography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a heading typeface and a body typeface. Leave either on the theme default to keep the original serif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store footer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer has a text area on the left, a menu in the middle, a newsletter form and links to your social media profiles. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related articles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua Theme Changelog]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=File:Antiqua-theme-colour-schemes.png&amp;diff=10313</id>
		<title>File:Antiqua-theme-colour-schemes.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=File:Antiqua-theme-colour-schemes.png&amp;diff=10313"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:55:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: The 15 built-in colour schemes in the Antiqua theme&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The 15 built-in colour schemes in the Antiqua theme&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=File:Antiqua-theme-home.png&amp;diff=10312</id>
		<title>File:Antiqua-theme-home.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=File:Antiqua-theme-home.png&amp;diff=10312"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:55:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Screenshot of the Antiqua theme home page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot of the Antiqua theme home page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10311</id>
		<title>Antiqua Theme Changelog</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10311"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:45:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Align the version 13.0 date with the theme&amp;#039;s own version metadata&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page lists updates, bug fixes and enhancements to the Antiqua theme. Earlier update details are not available, as this page was created with the release of version 13.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==8th November 2026 - Version 13.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The theme is now fully responsive. It adapts to phones, tablets and desktops, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling.&lt;br /&gt;
* The top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer on small screens, with drop-down sub-menus and a close button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Eight new colour schemes, bringing the total to 15: Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Accessibility work: a skip-to-content link, visible focus states on links and buttons, landmark regions, one H1 per page, and WCAG AA colour contrast throughout.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added support for [[Product Reviews]], including a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form on the product page, and average star ratings on product cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added related products on the product page, chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added social sharing buttons to the product page for Facebook, X, Pinterest, WhatsApp and email, plus a copy-link button. These no longer load any third-party scripts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Collection pages now display as a grid of product cards, with a product count and sorting options.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a page listing all of your collections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added breadcrumbs, and a quantity field on the product page.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Announcement&amp;quot; section in the Theme editor: a full-width bar above the header with its own text, background colour and text colour. The two colours use colour pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
* New typography settings, so the heading and body typefaces can be changed without editing the theme.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; setting. The logo keeps its own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a LinkedIn option to the footer social links. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Product page options: show or hide the vendor, product type and availability, choose which side the product image sits on, enable click-to-zoom, and start option menus on a &amp;quot;Please select&amp;quot; prompt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer account pages are now responsive, and the account, cart and logout links sit in the header as icons.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced page weight by removing unused JavaScript plugins and switching product images to responsive sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10310</id>
		<title>Antiqua Theme Changelog</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10310"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:44:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Match the rest of the theme articles: no category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page lists updates, bug fixes and enhancements to the Antiqua theme. Earlier update details are not available, as this page was created with the release of version 13.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==9th November 2026 - Version 13.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The theme is now fully responsive. It adapts to phones, tablets and desktops, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling.&lt;br /&gt;
* The top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer on small screens, with drop-down sub-menus and a close button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Eight new colour schemes, bringing the total to 15: Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Accessibility work: a skip-to-content link, visible focus states on links and buttons, landmark regions, one H1 per page, and WCAG AA colour contrast throughout.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added support for [[Product Reviews]], including a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form on the product page, and average star ratings on product cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added related products on the product page, chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added social sharing buttons to the product page for Facebook, X, Pinterest, WhatsApp and email, plus a copy-link button. These no longer load any third-party scripts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Collection pages now display as a grid of product cards, with a product count and sorting options.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a page listing all of your collections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added breadcrumbs, and a quantity field on the product page.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Announcement&amp;quot; section in the Theme editor: a full-width bar above the header with its own text, background colour and text colour. The two colours use colour pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
* New typography settings, so the heading and body typefaces can be changed without editing the theme.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; setting. The logo keeps its own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a LinkedIn option to the footer social links. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Product page options: show or hide the vendor, product type and availability, choose which side the product image sits on, enable click-to-zoom, and start option menus on a &amp;quot;Please select&amp;quot; prompt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer account pages are now responsive, and the account, cart and logout links sit in the header as icons.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced page weight by removing unused JavaScript plugins and switching product images to responsive sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_your_store%27s_footer&amp;diff=10309</id>
		<title>Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_your_store%27s_footer&amp;diff=10309"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:44:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Match the rest of the theme articles: no category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The footer runs across the bottom of every page in your store. In the Antiqua theme it has three columns - a text area on the left, a menu in the middle, and a newsletter form with your social media links on the right - followed by a row of accepted payment methods. All of it is set in the &amp;quot;Store footer&amp;quot; section of the Theme editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Left column ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a title in &amp;quot;Left Column Title&amp;quot; and your text in &amp;quot;Left Column Text&amp;quot;. This is a good place for a short paragraph about your store, your address or your trading hours. You can also use HTML in the text area, so an image or a link works here too. If you leave both fields blank the column disappears and the other columns move across to fill the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Middle column - Quick Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Footer menu&amp;quot; chooses which menu appears in the middle column. The heading above it is fixed as &amp;quot;Quick Links&amp;quot;. Menus are created in the &amp;quot;Store menus&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t select a menu, the column will be empty and you will see a gap, so either pick a menu or accept the shorter footer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Newsletter subscribe form ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The newsletter form sits on the right. Choose your provider in &amp;quot;Newsletter system&amp;quot; - MailChimp, Campaign Monitor or Mad Mimi - and paste the form&#039;s action URL into &amp;quot;Form action URL&amp;quot;. Detailed instructions for each provider are in [[Vintage theme - connecting your email subscriber form]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting &amp;quot;Newsletter system&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;None&amp;quot; hides the form entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Social media links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer shows an icon for each social media profile you enter. There are seven fields - Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, Instagram, LinkedIn, Vimeo and YouTube - and each takes the full URL of your profile, for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;https://www.facebook.com/spiffystores&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave a field blank and that icon simply doesn&#039;t appear, so you only show the networks you actually use. If every field is blank the row is hidden and no &amp;quot;Follow us&amp;quot; heading is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding a LinkedIn profile ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LinkedIn is included alongside the other networks. Paste your company or profile page URL into the &amp;quot;LinkedIn&amp;quot; field - for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;https://www.linkedin.com/company/your-company&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - and save. The icon appears at the end of the row, after Instagram. The same URL is also added to the structured data in your page&#039;s source, which helps search engines connect your store to your company page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment methods ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The row of accepted payment methods below the footer is generated from the payment methods enabled in your store, so there is nothing to configure in the theme.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10308</id>
		<title>Antiqua theme - selecting &amp; modifying your colour scheme</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10308"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:44:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Match the rest of the theme articles: no category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Antiqua theme comes with 15 built-in colour schemes. A scheme recolours the whole store at once - the damask band across the top of every page, the menu tabs, the side menu, headings, links, prices, buttons and the product hovers - so you don&#039;t have to change anything individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your colour scheme, open the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; in your store&#039;s Toolbox and look for the &amp;quot;Colour Scheme&amp;quot; section. Choose a scheme from the drop-down, then save. You can try each one on the [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Antiqua demo store] before you commit to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Scheme&lt;br /&gt;
! What it looks like&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Plum&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep plum band with pink accents. This is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Blue&lt;br /&gt;
| Mid blue band with brighter cyan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Green&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep green band with lime accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Grey&lt;br /&gt;
| Neutral charcoal band with soft grey accents. A good choice when your product photos carry the colour.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Purple&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep violet band with orchid accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Red&lt;br /&gt;
| Strong brick red band with a warmer red accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Teal&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep teal band with turquoise accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Orange&lt;br /&gt;
| Burnt orange band with terracotta accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Navy&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep navy band with royal blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive band with yellow-green accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Indigo&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep indigo band with violet accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Burgundy&lt;br /&gt;
| Dark wine red band with a deep rose accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Charcoal&lt;br /&gt;
| Near-black band with muted grey accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sand&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale warm beige band with dark brown text and tan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sky&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale blue band with dark navy text and mid blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About the pale schemes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sand and Sky are deliberately light. On these two schemes the store name, the header icons and the menu button switch from white to a dark ink so they stay readable against the pale band; the slide-out menu on phones stays dark, so it matches the rest of the theme. If you have a white or very pale logo image, those two schemes will hide it - use one of the darker schemes, or the store name as text, instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing the colours yourself ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schemes are built into the theme, so the drop-down is the supported way to change your colours. If you need something outside the 15 - your own brand colour, for example - that means editing the theme&#039;s stylesheet, which is covered in [[Customising your theme]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10307</id>
		<title>The Antiqua theme guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10307"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:44:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Match the rest of the theme articles: no category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Antiqua theme is a traditional style theme for Spiffy Stores, with a clean, simple and elegant layout for your products. It adjusts for all screen sizes and devices, so your store looks right whether your customer is on a desktop, a laptop, a tablet or a phone. [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Preview the theme], and resize your browser to see it in action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theme includes 15 colour schemes: Plum, Blue, Green, Grey, Purple, Red, Teal, Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|Click here to preview the different colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On phones and tablets the top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer, collection pages become a grid of product cards, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling. The theme is built with keyboard navigation, visible focus states and WCAG AA colour contrast in mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting started - Before you start to customise your theme ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1. Create your collections ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that it&#039;s difficult to customise your store and its menus until you have created some collections for your products. Collections are a way to organise your products by grouping them into categories. You create these in the &amp;quot;Collections&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2. Add your collections to your top menu ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have created your collections, add them to your store&#039;s menus in the &amp;quot;Store menus&amp;quot; section of your Toolbox. If you don&#039;t do this, your collections will go unseen by customers visiting your store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3. Add a few products to your store ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trying to modify an empty store means that you can&#039;t preview many of the features built into the theme, such as related products, which are chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Theme Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the theme is configured in the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox, without touching any code. Each section below corresponds to a group of settings in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colour Scheme ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the 15 built-in colour schemes. The scheme changes the header band, the menu, the side menu, headings, links, buttons and prices together, so the whole store stays consistent. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store Logo ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &amp;quot;Use a logo?&amp;quot; to replace the store name in the header with an uploaded image. &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; sets how wide the logo may be; its height follows the logo&#039;s own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped, and a logo narrower than the width you choose is shown at its own size. You can also upload a favicon, which is the small image shown in the browser&#039;s address bar and bookmark menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose which menu appears across the top of your store. The menu supports drop-down sub-menus. On phones and tablets this menu collapses into a slide-out drawer with a hamburger button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Product page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product page settings let you turn on customer reviews (with a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form), star ratings on product cards, social sharing links, related products, the quantity field, and the product vendor, product type and availability lines. You can also choose which side the product image sits on and whether clicking an image opens it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Show a &#039;Please select&#039; prompt on option menus?&amp;quot; makes product option menus start on a prompt instead of pre-selecting the first option, which avoids customers accidentally adding the wrong size or colour to the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Side menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side menu can be displayed on the left or the right, or turned off entirely. You can also hide the &amp;quot;Latest news&amp;quot; section, change the side menu heading and choose which menu appears in the sidebar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collection pages ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Display sorting options?&amp;quot; lets customers re-order a collection by price, name or date, and &amp;quot;Products per page&amp;quot; sets how many products appear before the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Announcement bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The announcement bar is a full-width strip that appears above the header on every page, for a sale, a shipping notice or a phone number. Turn it on, type your text, and choose the background and text colours with the colour pickers. Leaving the text blank hides the bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Typography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a heading typeface and a body typeface. Leave either on the theme default to keep the original serif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store footer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer has a text area on the left, a menu in the middle, a newsletter form and links to your social media profiles. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related articles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua Theme Changelog]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Spiffy_Stores_Themes&amp;diff=10306</id>
		<title>Spiffy Stores Themes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Spiffy_Stores_Themes&amp;diff=10306"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:43:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Link the Antiqua theme to its new knowledge base guide&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This section shows you how to use the built-in styles for Spiffy Stores E-commerce themes. It&#039;s a brand new section that we&#039;re working on right now. &amp;amp;nbsp;Please bear with us while we organise this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently each theme has instructions on how to customise it on it&#039;s demo store. This information is gradually being moved to pages in the knowledge base. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Simple Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Adelaide ecommerce theme guide|The Adelaide Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Melbourne ecommerce theme guide|The Melbourne theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Darwin Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Darwin Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Bendigo Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Bendigo Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Darwin Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Sydney Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Vintage theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Minimal theme guide]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Showtime theme guide]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Antiqua theme guide]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://fresh.spiffystores.com/ Fresh theme] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://dreamtheme.spiffystores.com/ Dream theme]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Georgia theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Seattle theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10305</id>
		<title>Antiqua Theme Changelog</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_Theme_Changelog&amp;diff=10305"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:43:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New article: changelog for the Antiqua theme, version 13.0&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page lists updates, bug fixes and enhancements to the Antiqua theme. Earlier update details are not available, as this page was created with the release of version 13.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==9th November 2026 - Version 13.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The theme is now fully responsive. It adapts to phones, tablets and desktops, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling.&lt;br /&gt;
* The top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer on small screens, with drop-down sub-menus and a close button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Eight new colour schemes, bringing the total to 15: Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Accessibility work: a skip-to-content link, visible focus states on links and buttons, landmark regions, one H1 per page, and WCAG AA colour contrast throughout.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added support for [[Product Reviews]], including a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form on the product page, and average star ratings on product cards.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added related products on the product page, chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added social sharing buttons to the product page for Facebook, X, Pinterest, WhatsApp and email, plus a copy-link button. These no longer load any third-party scripts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Collection pages now display as a grid of product cards, with a product count and sorting options.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a page listing all of your collections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added breadcrumbs, and a quantity field on the product page.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Announcement&amp;quot; section in the Theme editor: a full-width bar above the header with its own text, background colour and text colour. The two colours use colour pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
* New typography settings, so the heading and body typefaces can be changed without editing the theme.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; setting. The logo keeps its own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a LinkedIn option to the footer social links. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Product page options: show or hide the vendor, product type and availability, choose which side the product image sits on, enable click-to-zoom, and start option menus on a &amp;quot;Please select&amp;quot; prompt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer account pages are now responsive, and the account, cart and logout links sit in the header as icons.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced page weight by removing unused JavaScript plugins and switching product images to responsive sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Help]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_your_store%27s_footer&amp;diff=10304</id>
		<title>Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_your_store%27s_footer&amp;diff=10304"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:43:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New article: the Antiqua theme footer, including the new LinkedIn social link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The footer runs across the bottom of every page in your store. In the Antiqua theme it has three columns - a text area on the left, a menu in the middle, and a newsletter form with your social media links on the right - followed by a row of accepted payment methods. All of it is set in the &amp;quot;Store footer&amp;quot; section of the Theme editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Left column ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a title in &amp;quot;Left Column Title&amp;quot; and your text in &amp;quot;Left Column Text&amp;quot;. This is a good place for a short paragraph about your store, your address or your trading hours. You can also use HTML in the text area, so an image or a link works here too. If you leave both fields blank the column disappears and the other columns move across to fill the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Middle column - Quick Links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Footer menu&amp;quot; chooses which menu appears in the middle column. The heading above it is fixed as &amp;quot;Quick Links&amp;quot;. Menus are created in the &amp;quot;Store menus&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t select a menu, the column will be empty and you will see a gap, so either pick a menu or accept the shorter footer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Newsletter subscribe form ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The newsletter form sits on the right. Choose your provider in &amp;quot;Newsletter system&amp;quot; - MailChimp, Campaign Monitor or Mad Mimi - and paste the form&#039;s action URL into &amp;quot;Form action URL&amp;quot;. Detailed instructions for each provider are in [[Vintage theme - connecting your email subscriber form]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting &amp;quot;Newsletter system&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;None&amp;quot; hides the form entirely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Social media links ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer shows an icon for each social media profile you enter. There are seven fields - Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, Instagram, LinkedIn, Vimeo and YouTube - and each takes the full URL of your profile, for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;https://www.facebook.com/spiffystores&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave a field blank and that icon simply doesn&#039;t appear, so you only show the networks you actually use. If every field is blank the row is hidden and no &amp;quot;Follow us&amp;quot; heading is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding a LinkedIn profile ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LinkedIn is included alongside the other networks. Paste your company or profile page URL into the &amp;quot;LinkedIn&amp;quot; field - for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;https://www.linkedin.com/company/your-company&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; - and save. The icon appears at the end of the row, after Instagram. The same URL is also added to the structured data in your page&#039;s source, which helps search engines connect your store to your company page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment methods ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The row of accepted payment methods below the footer is generated from the payment methods enabled in your store, so there is nothing to configure in the theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Help]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10303</id>
		<title>Antiqua theme - selecting &amp; modifying your colour scheme</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Antiqua_theme_-_selecting_%26_modifying_your_colour_scheme&amp;diff=10303"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:43:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New article: the 15 colour schemes in the Antiqua theme&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Antiqua theme comes with 15 built-in colour schemes. A scheme recolours the whole store at once - the damask band across the top of every page, the menu tabs, the side menu, headings, links, prices, buttons and the product hovers - so you don&#039;t have to change anything individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your colour scheme, open the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; in your store&#039;s Toolbox and look for the &amp;quot;Colour Scheme&amp;quot; section. Choose a scheme from the drop-down, then save. You can try each one on the [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Antiqua demo store] before you commit to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Scheme&lt;br /&gt;
! What it looks like&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Plum&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep plum band with pink accents. This is the default.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Blue&lt;br /&gt;
| Mid blue band with brighter cyan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Green&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep green band with lime accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Grey&lt;br /&gt;
| Neutral charcoal band with soft grey accents. A good choice when your product photos carry the colour.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Purple&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep violet band with orchid accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Red&lt;br /&gt;
| Strong brick red band with a warmer red accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Teal&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep teal band with turquoise accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Orange&lt;br /&gt;
| Burnt orange band with terracotta accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Navy&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep navy band with royal blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive&lt;br /&gt;
| Olive band with yellow-green accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Indigo&lt;br /&gt;
| Deep indigo band with violet accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Burgundy&lt;br /&gt;
| Dark wine red band with a deep rose accent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Charcoal&lt;br /&gt;
| Near-black band with muted grey accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sand&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale warm beige band with dark brown text and tan accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sky&lt;br /&gt;
| Pale blue band with dark navy text and mid blue accents.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== About the pale schemes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sand and Sky are deliberately light. On these two schemes the store name, the header icons and the menu button switch from white to a dark ink so they stay readable against the pale band; the slide-out menu on phones stays dark, so it matches the rest of the theme. If you have a white or very pale logo image, those two schemes will hide it - use one of the darker schemes, or the store name as text, instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing the colours yourself ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The schemes are built into the theme, so the drop-down is the supported way to change your colours. If you need something outside the 15 - your own brand colour, for example - that means editing the theme&#039;s stylesheet, which is covered in [[Customising your theme]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Help]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10302</id>
		<title>The Antiqua theme guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=The_Antiqua_theme_guide&amp;diff=10302"/>
		<updated>2026-11-09T06:42:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New article: guide to the Antiqua theme and its Theme Editor settings&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Antiqua theme is a traditional style theme for Spiffy Stores, with a clean, simple and elegant layout for your products. It adjusts for all screen sizes and devices, so your store looks right whether your customer is on a desktop, a laptop, a tablet or a phone. [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Preview the theme], and resize your browser to see it in action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The theme includes 15 colour schemes: Plum, Blue, Green, Grey, Purple, Red, Teal, Orange, Navy, Olive, Indigo, Burgundy, Charcoal, Sand and Sky. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|Click here to preview the different colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On phones and tablets the top menu collapses into a slide-out drawer, collection pages become a grid of product cards, and every page fits the screen without sideways scrolling. The theme is built with keyboard navigation, visible focus states and WCAG AA colour contrast in mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting started - Before you start to customise your theme ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1. Create your collections ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that it&#039;s difficult to customise your store and its menus until you have created some collections for your products. Collections are a way to organise your products by grouping them into categories. You create these in the &amp;quot;Collections&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2. Add your collections to your top menu ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have created your collections, add them to your store&#039;s menus in the &amp;quot;Store menus&amp;quot; section of your Toolbox. If you don&#039;t do this, your collections will go unseen by customers visiting your store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3. Add a few products to your store ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trying to modify an empty store means that you can&#039;t preview many of the features built into the theme, such as related products, which are chosen from your product tags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Theme Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the theme is configured in the &amp;quot;Theme editor&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox, without touching any code. Each section below corresponds to a group of settings in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colour Scheme ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the 15 built-in colour schemes. The scheme changes the header band, the menu, the side menu, headings, links, buttons and prices together, so the whole store stays consistent. [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme|See the colour schemes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store Logo ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &amp;quot;Use a logo?&amp;quot; to replace the store name in the header with an uploaded image. &amp;quot;Maximum logo width&amp;quot; sets how wide the logo may be; its height follows the logo&#039;s own proportions, so it is never squashed or cropped, and a logo narrower than the width you choose is shown at its own size. You can also upload a favicon, which is the small image shown in the browser&#039;s address bar and bookmark menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose which menu appears across the top of your store. The menu supports drop-down sub-menus. On phones and tablets this menu collapses into a slide-out drawer with a hamburger button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Product page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product page settings let you turn on customer reviews (with a star rating and a &amp;quot;Write a review&amp;quot; form), star ratings on product cards, social sharing links, related products, the quantity field, and the product vendor, product type and availability lines. You can also choose which side the product image sits on and whether clicking an image opens it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Show a &#039;Please select&#039; prompt on option menus?&amp;quot; makes product option menus start on a prompt instead of pre-selecting the first option, which avoids customers accidentally adding the wrong size or colour to the cart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Side menu ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side menu can be displayed on the left or the right, or turned off entirely. You can also hide the &amp;quot;Latest news&amp;quot; section, change the side menu heading and choose which menu appears in the sidebar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collection pages ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Display sorting options?&amp;quot; lets customers re-order a collection by price, name or date, and &amp;quot;Products per page&amp;quot; sets how many products appear before the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Announcement bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The announcement bar is a full-width strip that appears above the header on every page, for a sale, a shipping notice or a phone number. Turn it on, type your text, and choose the background and text colours with the colour pickers. Leaving the text blank hides the bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Typography ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a heading typeface and a body typeface. Leave either on the theme default to keep the original serif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Store footer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer has a text area on the left, a menu in the middle, a newsletter form and links to your social media profiles. [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer|See your store&#039;s footer]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related articles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - selecting &amp;amp; modifying your colour scheme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua theme - your store&#039;s footer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Antiqua Theme Changelog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Help]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10301</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10301"/>
		<updated>2026-11-01T23:47:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Note the pick list options are in the sidebar&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A split line shows the units coming from each location in the order&#039;s Location column, so you can see what to pick from where. The order is packed as one parcel per location, and each location is shipped and tracked separately, so an order can have more than one shipment. Shipping an order creates one shipment per location, each with its own tracking number, shipping confirmation email and packing slip, and the order page shows what has shipped and what is still to ship at each location. To ship one parcel, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it on the order: the shipping form opens for that parcel only, so you can enter its tracking number and choose whether to email the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping is calculated for each location and added together, so the customer pays for every parcel. A flat rate is charged once, however many locations are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print what to pick, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick list&#039;&#039;&#039; beside a parcel on the order, or beside a location on the Locations page to print everything still to pick for that location across all paid orders. The Orders page also has a &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick Lists&#039;&#039;&#039; menu listing each location with the number of items waiting to be picked there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your store has no Locations defined, the menu offers a single &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location&#039;&#039;&#039; list instead, covering all orders. A store that does have Locations also shows an &#039;&#039;&#039;Unassigned&#039;&#039;&#039; list for older orders whose stock was not recorded against a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how the pick list is grouped and sorted from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick list options&#039;&#039;&#039; in the sidebar: group &#039;&#039;&#039;by order&#039;&#039;&#039; (one block per order) or &#039;&#039;&#039;by product&#039;&#039;&#039; (one row per product, with the order numbers it covers), and sort by &#039;&#039;&#039;bin location&#039;&#039;&#039; (the warehouse walk order, with items that have no bin code last), SKU or order. Each option applies immediately when clicked. Each line shows the bin code, SKU, product and options, and the quantity to pick, with a column to tick items off. Items already shipped are excluded, and partly shipped orders appear again for the remainder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10300</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10300"/>
		<updated>2026-11-01T22:02:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document the Default location pick list&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A split line shows the units coming from each location in the order&#039;s Location column, so you can see what to pick from where. The order is packed as one parcel per location, and each location is shipped and tracked separately, so an order can have more than one shipment. Shipping an order creates one shipment per location, each with its own tracking number, shipping confirmation email and packing slip, and the order page shows what has shipped and what is still to ship at each location. To ship one parcel, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it on the order: the shipping form opens for that parcel only, so you can enter its tracking number and choose whether to email the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping is calculated for each location and added together, so the customer pays for every parcel. A flat rate is charged once, however many locations are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print what to pick, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick list&#039;&#039;&#039; beside a parcel on the order, or beside a location on the Locations page to print everything still to pick for that location across all paid orders. The Orders page also has a &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick Lists&#039;&#039;&#039; menu listing each location with the number of items waiting to be picked there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your store has no Locations defined, the menu offers a single &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location&#039;&#039;&#039; list instead, covering all orders. A store that does have Locations also shows an &#039;&#039;&#039;Unassigned&#039;&#039;&#039; list for older orders whose stock was not recorded against a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A pick list can be grouped &#039;&#039;&#039;by order&#039;&#039;&#039; (one block per order) or &#039;&#039;&#039;by product&#039;&#039;&#039; (one row per product, with the order numbers it covers), and sorted by &#039;&#039;&#039;bin location&#039;&#039;&#039; (the warehouse walk order, with items that have no bin code last), SKU or order. Each line shows the bin code, SKU, product and options, and the quantity to pick, with a column to tick items off. Items already shipped are excluded, and partly shipped orders appear again for the remainder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10299</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10299"/>
		<updated>2026-11-01T06:32:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document the Pick Lists menu and pick list options&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A split line shows the units coming from each location in the order&#039;s Location column, so you can see what to pick from where. The order is packed as one parcel per location, and each location is shipped and tracked separately, so an order can have more than one shipment. Shipping an order creates one shipment per location, each with its own tracking number, shipping confirmation email and packing slip, and the order page shows what has shipped and what is still to ship at each location. To ship one parcel, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it on the order: the shipping form opens for that parcel only, so you can enter its tracking number and choose whether to email the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping is calculated for each location and added together, so the customer pays for every parcel. A flat rate is charged once, however many locations are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print what to pick, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick list&#039;&#039;&#039; beside a parcel on the order, or beside a location on the Locations page to print everything still to pick for that location across all paid orders. The Orders page also has a &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick Lists&#039;&#039;&#039; menu listing each location with the number of items waiting to be picked there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A pick list can be grouped &#039;&#039;&#039;by order&#039;&#039;&#039; (one block per order) or &#039;&#039;&#039;by product&#039;&#039;&#039; (one row per product, with the order numbers it covers), and sorted by &#039;&#039;&#039;bin location&#039;&#039;&#039; (the warehouse walk order, with items that have no bin code last), SKU or order. Each line shows the bin code, SKU, product and options, and the quantity to pick, with a column to tick items off. Items already shipped are excluded, and partly shipped orders appear again for the remainder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10298</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10298"/>
		<updated>2026-10-31T06:52:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document shipping a single parcel from the order&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A split line shows the units coming from each location in the order&#039;s Location column, so you can see what to pick from where. The order is packed as one parcel per location, and each location is shipped and tracked separately, so an order can have more than one shipment. Shipping an order creates one shipment per location, each with its own tracking number, shipping confirmation email and packing slip, and the order page shows what has shipped and what is still to ship at each location. To ship one parcel, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it on the order: the shipping form opens for that parcel only, so you can enter its tracking number and choose whether to email the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping is calculated for each location and added together, so the customer pays for every parcel. A flat rate is charged once, however many locations are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print what to pick, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick list&#039;&#039;&#039; beside a parcel on the order, or beside a location on the Locations page to print everything still to pick for that location across all paid orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10297</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10297"/>
		<updated>2026-10-30T11:23:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document per-location shipments and tracking&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A split line shows the units coming from each location in the order&#039;s Location column, so you can see what to pick from where. The order is packed as one parcel per location, and each location is shipped and tracked separately, so an order can have more than one shipment. Shipping an order creates one shipment per location, each with its own tracking number, shipping confirmation email and packing slip, and the order page shows what has shipped and what is still to ship at each location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping is calculated for each location and added together, so the customer pays for every parcel. A flat rate is charged once, however many locations are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print what to pick, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick list&#039;&#039;&#039; beside a parcel on the order, or beside a location on the Locations page to print everything still to pick for that location across all paid orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10296</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10296"/>
		<updated>2026-10-30T07:19:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document per-location parcels, shipping and pick lists&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A split line shows the units coming from each location in the order&#039;s Location column, so you can see what to pick from where. The order is packed as one parcel per location, and each parcel is shipped and tracked separately, so an order can have more than one shipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping is calculated for each location and added together, so the customer pays for every parcel. A flat rate is charged once, however many locations are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print what to pick, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Pick list&#039;&#039;&#039; beside a parcel on the order, or beside a location on the Locations page to print everything still to pick for that location across all paid orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10295</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10295"/>
		<updated>2026-10-30T05:31:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Note that the order shows where a split line is fulfilled from&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A split line shows the units coming from each location in the order&#039;s Location column, so you can see what to pick from where.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10294</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10294"/>
		<updated>2026-10-30T03:24:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Note that pickup orders and bundles are not split&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pickup orders are never split: the customer collects the units from the store they chose, so an item that the pickup location cannot cover is not fulfilled from another location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10293</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10293"/>
		<updated>2026-10-30T02:47:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document split fulfilment across locations&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no single location can cover the quantity ordered for an item, the order is split across locations: the units are drawn from the other online locations in the order the locations are listed, and each location&#039;s stock is reduced by the units it supplies. The Committed figure for each location then shows only the units that location still has to ship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles are always fulfilled from one location, so a bundle that no single location can cover is not split.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Product_Management&amp;diff=10292</id>
		<title>Bulk Product Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Product_Management&amp;diff=10292"/>
		<updated>2026-10-26T06:15:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document new bulk variant actions: Set Stock Tracking and Set Inventory Policy&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Image:Bulk-product-management.jpg&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managing products one at a time can be time-consuming, particularly for larger catalogues. Spiffy Stores includes a range of bulk management tools that allow you to update multiple products or variants simultaneously, helping you maintain consistency while significantly reducing the time spent on routine administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bulk actions are available from both the &#039;&#039;&#039;Your Products&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory&#039;&#039;&#039; pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process for using bulk actions is the same throughout the administration area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the search and filter options to display the products or variants you want to update.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the required items using the checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the appropriate action from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Bulk Actions&#039;&#039;&#039; dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any additional information required for that action.&lt;br /&gt;
# Confirm the update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the selected products or variants are modified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Benefits of Bulk Product Management ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bulk actions provide a fast and efficient way to maintain your catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Save time&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update dozens or even hundreds of products or variants in a single operation instead of editing each item individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Reduce errors&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply the same settings consistently across multiple items, reducing manual mistakes and ensuring uniform product data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Stay organised&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep collections, tags, shipping information and fulfilment settings aligned across your catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Work more efficiently&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combine bulk actions with the product search and filtering tools to target exactly the products or variants that require updating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product Actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
Add one or more tags to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tags can be used to organise products, improve searching, assist with merchandising, or drive theme and application functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding tags:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Existing tags are preserved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Only the new tags are added.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicate tags are ignored automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
Remove one or more tags from all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ending promotional campaigns.&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing outdated classifications.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cleaning up product data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the specified tags are removed. Any other tags assigned to the products remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add to Collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the selected products to a standard collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the collection you want to use from the dropdown list, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected product is added to the chosen collection without affecting any of its existing collection memberships.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Organising seasonal or promotional products.&lt;br /&gt;
* Preparing products for a sale or marketing campaign.&lt;br /&gt;
* Grouping related products for navigation or reporting.&lt;br /&gt;
* Adding newly imported products to an existing collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Products can belong to more than one standard collection, so adding products to a collection does not remove them from any other collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove from Collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the selected products from a standard collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the collection from which the products should be removed, then confirm the bulk action. Only the selected collection membership is removed. The products themselves are not deleted, and their membership of any other collections is unaffected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing products from expired promotions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reorganising catalogue categories.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cleaning up seasonal collections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Correcting products that were assigned to the wrong collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Shipping Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a shipping code to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping codes are used by your configured shipping rates to calculate delivery costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using this action allows you to quickly ensure that products sharing the same fulfilment requirements are charged correctly without editing each product individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Product Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a standardised product category to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a category using the searchable list, then confirm the bulk action. Product categories make it easier to publish your products on other platforms, such as the Facebook Product Catalog. Products without a category may be excluded from those feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product&#039;s category is stored with its product type, so setting a category does not change the product&#039;s Product Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Product Type ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a product type to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a type from the dropdown list, then confirm the bulk action. Examples of product types include &amp;quot;PC Computer Games&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Scarves&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Garden Hoses&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The category assigned to each selected product is preserved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Product Vendor ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a product vendor to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a vendor from the dropdown list, then confirm the bulk action. The vendor is the creator or manufacturer of the product, such as IBM or Adidas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only vendors that already exist in your shop can be selected. To use a new vendor, add it to a product first and it will then appear in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Publish Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Publish the selected products, making them available to customers through your online store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Products must also be included in the appropriate collections, menus or other store navigation before customers can easily find them. Publishing a product does not automatically add it to a collection or navigation menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action is useful after:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing or creating a group of new products.&lt;br /&gt;
* Completing product descriptions, images and pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Preparing products in advance of a new range or campaign.&lt;br /&gt;
* Restoring products that were previously hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before publishing products in bulk, check that their prices, inventory settings, images, shipping details and descriptions are complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hide Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Hide the selected products from your online store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden products remain in your administration area and can still be edited, managed and published again later. Hiding a product does not delete its product information, variants, images or inventory records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action is useful when:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A product is temporarily unavailable.&lt;br /&gt;
* Product information needs to be reviewed or updated.&lt;br /&gt;
* A seasonal product should be removed from sale.&lt;br /&gt;
* A product is being prepared for a future release.&lt;br /&gt;
* You want to stop selling a product without permanently deleting it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Hiding and showing Products]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Permanently delete the selected products from your shop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deleting products is a destructive action and should be used carefully. Product information, variants, images and related catalogue data may no longer be available after deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before deleting products in bulk:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Confirm that the correct products have been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
* Consider hiding products instead if they may be sold again.&lt;br /&gt;
* Export or retain any product information that may be required later.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check whether the products are still referenced by collections, navigation, promotions or external links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this action for products that are no longer required and will not need to be restored. For products that are only temporarily unavailable, use &#039;&#039;&#039;Hide Products&#039;&#039;&#039; instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Variant Actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Shipping Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a shipping code to all selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping codes are used by your configured shipping rates to calculate delivery costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using this action allows you to quickly ensure that products sharing the same fulfilment requirements are charged correctly without editing each variant individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Location Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a warehouse or storage location code to selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location codes help staff:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Locate stock more quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Improve picking accuracy.&lt;br /&gt;
* Speed up packing and fulfilment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Weight ===&lt;br /&gt;
Update the weight of multiple variants at once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weights are entered using your shop&#039;s configured weight unit (for example kilograms or pounds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accurate product weights help ensure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Correct shipping charges.&lt;br /&gt;
* Accurate carrier calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced shipping discrepancies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Dimensions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the width, length and height for multiple variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintaining accurate dimensions allows shipping carriers to correctly calculate volumetric weight for larger or bulky items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps avoid incorrect shipping charges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Ship Separately ===&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the requirement for selected variants to be shipped in a separate package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable this option for products that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Cannot safely be packed with other items.&lt;br /&gt;
* Require their own shipping carton.&lt;br /&gt;
* Need special handling during transport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Free Shipping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable free shipping for the selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When free shipping is enabled, the selected variants are treated as free-shipping items when the shop calculates the available shipping rates. Other products or variants in the same order may still attract shipping charges according to your configured shipping rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Running shipping promotions on selected products or variants.&lt;br /&gt;
* Offering free delivery for specific product ranges.&lt;br /&gt;
* Applying the same free-shipping setting across all variants of a product.&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing free shipping when a promotion finishes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review your shop&#039;s shipping-rate configuration after making this change to ensure that mixed orders containing both free-shipping and normally charged items behave as expected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stock at Location ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark the selected variants as stocked at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the location from the list of enabled locations, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected variant is marked as stocked at that location, so it becomes available to the shop&#039;s order allocation and appears when the inventory list is filtered by that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only inventory-tracked variants are affected. Variants that do not track stock are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stocking a variant at a location does not change any existing stock quantities. Use the location&#039;s stock controls on the product page to adjust the quantity held there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unstock at Location ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark the selected variants as no longer stocked at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the location from the list, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected variant&#039;s stock record at that location is removed, so the variant no longer appears when the inventory list is filtered by that location. All locations are listed, including disabled ones, so stock can be cleared from a location that is no longer in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A variant can only be unstocked from a location when every quantity at that location is zero. Variants that still hold stock at the location are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated and how many were skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unstocking permanently removes the variant&#039;s stock record and its movement history at that location. If you may need that history, adjust or transfer the stock to zero first and export any records you need to keep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Stock Tracking ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turn stock level tracking on or off for all selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose either &amp;quot;Track this variation&#039;s stock level&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Don&#039;t track stock level&amp;quot;, then confirm the bulk action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracking a variant&#039;s stock lets Spiffy Stores allocate that stock to orders and deduct it as items are sold. Turning tracking off stops stock being counted for the variant, so it is always treated as available regardless of its inventory policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turning tracking off sets the variant&#039;s stock quantity to zero, but it does not delete its stock records, so the quantities held at each location are kept. If tracking is turned back on later, the variant&#039;s available quantity is rebuilt from those records. In a shop that does not use locations, there are no stock records to rebuild from, so the quantity starts again at zero and must be re-entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variants that are part of a bundle take their stock tracking from the bundle&#039;s components, and gift card variants do not hold stock. These variants are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated and how many were skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Inventory Policy ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose what should happen when the selected variants are out of stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select one of the following, then confirm the bulk action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Continue&#039;&#039;&#039; — customers can still purchase the variant when its stock reaches zero, allowing back orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Stop&#039;&#039;&#039; — the variant can no longer be purchased once its stock reaches zero.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Archive and stop&#039;&#039;&#039; — the variant can no longer be purchased, and its product is archived and hidden from your online store once it sells out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The inventory policy only applies to variants that track their stock level. Setting a policy on a variant that does not track stock has no immediate effect, but the policy is kept and takes effect if tracking is turned on later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bundles take their policy from their components, and gift card variants do not hold stock. These variants are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated and how many were skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Further Reference ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Hiding and showing Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Search.liquid&amp;diff=10291</id>
		<title>Search.liquid</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Search.liquid&amp;diff=10291"/>
		<updated>2026-10-26T04:00:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Link to How store search works&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This template is rendered to display the results of a search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not provide a &#039;&#039;&#039;search.liquid&#039;&#039;&#039; template in your theme, a default system template will be used instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[How store search works]] for what is matched and how the results are ranked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;searchresults&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;form action=&amp;quot;/search&amp;quot; method=&amp;quot;get&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;text&amp;quot; name=&amp;quot;q&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;{{ search.terms | escape }}&amp;quot; id=&amp;quot;q&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;input type=&amp;quot;submit&amp;quot; value=&amp;quot;Search&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:100px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/form&amp;gt;{% if search.results_count == 0 %}{% if search.terms.size &amp;gt; 0 %}&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Your search for &amp;quot;{{ search.terms | escape }}&amp;quot; did not yield any results&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;{% endif %}{% else %}&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;{% for hit in search.results %}&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;{{ hit.title | link_to: hit.url, hit.title }}&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;{% if hit.images_count &amp;gt; 0 %}&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;result-image&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        {{ hit.featured_image | img_url: &#039;thumb&#039; | img_tag: hit.title | link_to: hit.url, hit.title }}&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;{% endif %}&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;{{ hit.content | strip_html | truncate: 450 }}&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;clear:left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;{% endfor %}&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;{% endif %}&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each item in the search results can be either a Product, Collection, Page, Article or Blog. You can retrieve the type of object as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
item.object_type =&amp;gt; &#039;product&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following object types are returned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* product&lt;br /&gt;
* collection&lt;br /&gt;
* page&lt;br /&gt;
* article&lt;br /&gt;
* blog&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;&#039;search.liquid&#039;&#039;&#039; you have access to the following variables:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - template|template]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - page_title|page_title]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - shop|shop]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - cart|cart]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - products|products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - collections|collections]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - linklists|linklists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - pages|pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - blogs|blogs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - request|request]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - cookies|cookies]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - header|header]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Template Variables - search|search]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Further Reference ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Tag Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Filter Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Variable Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Paginate Tag|Pagination ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=10290</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=10290"/>
		<updated>2026-10-26T03:59:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Link to the new How store search works article&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you&#039;re new to Spiffy Stores, you should read our [https://www.spiffystores.com.au/getting-started-guide Getting started guide]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;columns small-12 medium-6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Getting started ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.spiffystores.com.au/getting-started-guide Getting started guide]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Toolbox login]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to Use AI in your Spiffy Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AI Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Introduction to shipping &amp;amp; handling|How does shipping work?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout &amp;amp; Payment|How do I accept payments?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Which web browser do I use?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enabling Cookies in your Web Browser|Enabling cookies in your web browser]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enabling JavaScript in your Web Browser|Enabling JavaScript in your web browser]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Spiffy Stores Themes|Editing the look &amp;amp;amp; feel of your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Submitting your store to search engines]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Locking / Hiding / Password Protecting Your Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DNS &amp;amp; Domains|How do I use my own domain name?]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing a Shopify store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Cloudflare]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Adding_new_Products|Adding new products to your store]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Product_Variations|Product variations]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Custom_Product_Options|Custom product options]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Images|Product images &amp;amp;amp; custom image sizes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Tags|Product Tags]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How store search works]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Adding_to_Collections|Adding products to collections]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Featured Products|How to create featured products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product Bundles|Creating bundles of products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bulk Product Export and Import|Importing and exporting your products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Exporting for Merchants]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bulk Product Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating Digital Downloads|Selling digital downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Providing downloadable products]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Infinite Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Gift_Cards|Selling Gift Cards]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Collections ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collections|Introduction to Collections]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Standard Collections]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Super Collections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blogs &amp;amp;amp; pages ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages|Introduction to blogs &amp;amp;amp; pages]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Pages|Pages]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Blogs|Blogs]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Formatting_your_content|Formatting text &amp;amp;amp; images]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs &amp;amp; Pages#Links|Adding in links]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced textile editing|Advanced textile editing]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inserting photos into pages and blog articles|Inserting photos into pages and blog articles]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the &amp;quot;more&amp;quot; tag to split blog articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Example Policy Pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preferences ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[General Preferences]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Standards &amp;amp; Formats]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Regions &amp;amp; Taxes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout &amp;amp; Payment]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout Rules]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DNS &amp;amp; Domains]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shipping &amp;amp;amp; handling ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Introduction to shipping &amp;amp; handling]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up custom shipping rates|Setting up custom shipping rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collection shipping codes and global shipping rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Australia Post Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using NZ Post Shipping|Using New Zealand Post Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Fastway Couriers Shipping|Using Fastway Couriers Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using FedEx shipping|Using FedEx Shipping]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Weight-based Shipping with Australia Post|Setting up weight based rates if you&#039;re using Australia Post]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Weight-based Shipping with Sendle|Setting up weight based rates if you&#039;re using Sendle]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding Shipping Insurance Cover to your shipping rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipping to the US under the new tariff regime]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fulfilment Services ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using a fulfilment service]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipping Products using a fulfilment service]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Australia Post Parcel Contact (formerly eParcel)]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Activating Australia Post Parcel Contract (formerly eParcel) Fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Australia Post MyPost Business]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Activating Australia Post MyPost Business Fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Sendle]]&lt;br /&gt;
** [[Activating Sendle Fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shipping Orders with batch fulfilment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Discounts &amp;amp;amp; coupon codes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Discounts &amp;amp; Coupon Codes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Shopping Cart Discounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your account ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding staff accounts|Adding and deleting staff accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Controlling staff access]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Changing a store&#039;s owner]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Account Security]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Order notifications|Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to update the credit card on your account]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to upgrade or downgrade to a different plan]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Can I use multiple currencies or multiple languages in my store?]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to activate your new Spiffy Store]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to cancel your Spiffy Store]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lost_your_store_password?|Lost your password?]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Pausing your store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orders ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Order Management and Status|Order management and status]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Order Shipping and Billing Addresses|Order shipping and billing addresses]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reducing fraud in your online store|Reducing fraud]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recent Orders Data Feed|Recent orders data feed]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Abandoned Orders|Abandoned orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Downloading Your Orders|Downloading your orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Cancelling an Order|Cancelling an order]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Refunding an Order|Refunding an order]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Draft Orders|Draft Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Customers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Configuring Customer Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Information about your customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to filter your customer view and create customer groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Importing and exporting your customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Wholesale support for customer accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;columns small-12 medium-6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Customising your theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building a Theme for Spiffy Stores]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Spiffy Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How do Themes work?|How do themes work?]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Spiffy Stores Themes|Customising your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Global Javascript Assets|Using global Javascript assets]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Global Liquid Snippets|Using global Liquid snippets]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the Spiffy Ajax API]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Theme Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using WebDAV to edit your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Editing your email templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a custom Web Font to your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Specifying the path for image files in stylesheets]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Theme guides ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Changing to a different theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Updating your theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Simple Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Adelaide ecommerce theme guide|The Adelaide Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Melbourne ecommerce theme guide|The Melbourne theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Darwin Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Darwin Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Bendigo Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Bendigo Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Sydney Ecommerce Theme Guide|The Sydney Theme Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Vintage theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Minimal theme guide]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Showtime theme guide]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://antiqua.spiffystores.com/ Antiqua theme] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://fresh.spiffystores.com/ Fresh theme] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://dreamtheme.spiffystores.com/ Dream theme]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Georgia theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Seattle theme guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using Liquid ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Basics]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Tag Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Variable Reference|The variables you can use ]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Filter Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Paginate Tag|Pagination ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Liquid Collection Sorting|Sorting Products in a Collection ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing &amp;amp;amp; rendering out menus ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to create and edit your store menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Marketing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product data feeds]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Selling on Facebook]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set up Shoppable Posts on Instagram|Setting up Shoppable Posts on Instagram]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding Facebook Messenger to your store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Information for SEO Professionals]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Email Marketing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Ecommerce Affiliate Marketing &amp;amp; Referral Programs|Affiliate Marketing &amp;amp; Referral Programs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Abandoned Checkouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Back in Stock Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using Apps and Add-Ons ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Available Apps]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Infinite Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Checkout Rules]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Abandoned Checkouts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product data feeds]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reducing fraud in your online store|MaxMind Anti-fraud]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Migrating to Spiffy Stores ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[URL Redirects]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bulk Product Export and Import|Importing and exporting your products]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tutorials ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to change the title of the home page]]  &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to enable Google Analytics]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to verify your site in Google&#039;s Webmaster Tools]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to create an XML product feed]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Asking your customer for additional information]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Dreamweaver to edit your store theme]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Web Hook|Creating Web Hooks]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding comments to blog articles|Adding comments to blog articles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to add a link to a page]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating custom meta tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a quantity field to your product pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Making design tweaks to your store]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Getting help using TeamViewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting up your email ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[An introduction to Email]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up your email|How to set up your Spiffy Stores email]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to access your Spiffy Stores mailboxes through webmail]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to set up your email program to access your Spiffy Stores mailboxes]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Microsoft Outlook]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to Configure Microsoft Outlook 2003]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Mozilla Thunderbird]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Microsoft Outlook Express]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Mac Mail on OSX]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure Outlook 2011 on OSX]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure an Apple iPhone using IOS 14|How to configure an Apple iPhone]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to configure an Apple iPhone using IOS 14|How to configure an Apple iPad]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setting up your email#Instructions_for_using_Gmail_to_handle_your_email|Using Gmail to handle your email]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Mailbox quota warnings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[I can receive but can&#039;t send mail]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[How to reset your email password]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== API Documentation for Developers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[An Introduction to the Spiffy Stores API]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating Private API Keys]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using the API]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[API Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=How_store_search_works&amp;diff=10289</id>
		<title>How store search works</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=How_store_search_works&amp;diff=10289"/>
		<updated>2026-10-26T03:58:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document what store search matches and how results are ranked&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Store search lets your customers find products, collections, pages and blog articles using the search box in your storefront header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search is built in and works the same way for every store, so there is nothing to configure and no add-on to install. This article explains what is searched and how results are ranked, so you can make sure your products are found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is searched ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;&#039;&#039;products&#039;&#039;&#039;, search looks at:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* the product title&lt;br /&gt;
* the product description&lt;br /&gt;
* product tags&lt;br /&gt;
* the SKUs of the product&#039;s variations&lt;br /&gt;
* the vendor name&lt;br /&gt;
* the product type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For collections, pages and blog articles, the title and body are searched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search does &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; look at metafields, custom product options, variation option values, barcodes or images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only published products are returned. Unpublished and archived products are excluded, as are products restricted to customer groups that the shopper is not in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How words are matched ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;All of the words must match, in any order.&#039;&#039;&#039; Searching for &#039;&#039;lando general&#039;&#039; returns the same products as &#039;&#039;general lando&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Part numbers match without exact spacing.&#039;&#039;&#039; A search for &#039;&#039;9574&#039;&#039; finds a SKU of E9574, and &#039;&#039;vc 47&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;vc-47&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;VC47&#039;&#039; all find a product with a code of VC47.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Misspellings are tolerated.&#039;&#039;&#039; A search for &#039;&#039;calrisian&#039;&#039; still finds &#039;&#039;Calrissian&#039;&#039;, as long as the correct spelling appears somewhere in your published content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quoted phrases match exactly.&#039;&#039;&#039; Searching for &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;general lando&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; only matches that phrase, in that order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a customer searches for several words and one of them does not appear anywhere in a product, that product is not returned. Adding the words a customer is likely to use - a character name, a product line, an alternative spelling or a part number - to the product&#039;s tags will make it easier to find.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How results are ranked ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matches in the product title, SKUs and tags rank above matches in the description, so a product whose title contains the search words appears before one that only mentions them in its description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 50 results are returned. Encouraging customers to be more specific, or to search for a part number, narrows the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips for making products easier to find ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Put manufacturer part numbers in the variation &#039;&#039;&#039;SKU&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add alternative names, character names and common misspellings as product &#039;&#039;&#039;tags&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the words a customer is likely to use appear in the product title or description. A product whose description never mentions a character, series or line will not be found by that name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep titles specific - the title carries the most weight in ranking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related articles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Products#Tags|Product Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Search.liquid]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customising your search results page]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Inventory_Export_and_Import&amp;diff=10274</id>
		<title>Bulk Inventory Export and Import</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Inventory_Export_and_Import&amp;diff=10274"/>
		<updated>2026-10-19T04:01:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Clarify exported-only Incoming, Unavailable and Committed columns&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;You are able to Export and Import your store inventory using CSV (Comma-Separated Values) files. CSV files can be created and edited with products such as Excel and Open Office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is similar to the more generic [[Bulk Product Export and Import]] feature, but is specifically designed to make it much easier to update just the inventory levels for your products. Just download the inventory for your current products as a CSV, and use that file as a template in order to update the inventory levels for your products. Once updated, the CSV file can be imported, as described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to inventory levels, the Inventory CSV file can also be used to update other details for your product variations, such as the price, weight, dimensions, barcode and shipping options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You cannot use the Inventory CSV file to import new products. You must use the full product CSV as defined in the [[Bulk Product Export and Import]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also import a CSV file of your inventory downloaded from Shopify. If you&#039;re having problems importing inventory levels from Shopify, please send us your CSV file at [mailto:support@spiffystores.com.au support@spiffystores.com.au].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also export and import your store prices. Please refer to the details in [[Bulk Prices Export and Import]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting Inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Export Inventory.png|Choosing the Export Inventory options&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export all Inventory&#039;&#039;&#039; link on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Products&#039;&#039;&#039; page to download a CSV file containing just the Inventory levels of the products in your online store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This link is also available on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory&#039;&#039;&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also choose the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export all Inventory in current group&#039;&#039;&#039; to download a CSV file of the inventory levels for a selected group of products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file can be edited and used to update your product inventory levels in bulk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please refer to the following section on [[#Importing_Inventory|Importing Inventory]] for details on the format of the CSV file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Inventory  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Import Inventory.png|Choosing the Import Products option&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Import more products&#039;&#039;&#039; link to go to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Import&#039;&#039;&#039; page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same process is used for the Product CSV files as well as the Inventory CSV files. The Product Import can determine the type of file being imported automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Product Import Page  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Inventory Product Import.png|Product Import page&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Import&#039;&#039;&#039; page contains some instructions on how to use the product import process. In the side-bar are the answers to a number of commonly asked questions about importing products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want a template CSV file to use to start building your product update CSV file, then click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Download Template CSV&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This is only used for full Product imports, and if you want to use an Inventory import CSV file, you should do an export of the Inventory first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Product import 8.png|Select the CSV file to import&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your CSV file needs to adhere to the following conventions in order for it to be used to import products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can freely use UTF-8 character encodings for product titles and product descriptions, but be sure to create them using a Unicode or UTF-8 enabled program. The OpenOffice.org suite of programs is suitable for this purpose. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A CSV file (Comma-Separated Values) file is a plain text file with commas delimiting the fields. The first line of the CSV file is the header, and contains the name of the fields. The sample template CSV file can assist you with the correct heading values. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first line of the CSV file must have the following heading columns. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;Handle&lt;br /&gt;
Title&lt;br /&gt;
Option1 Name&lt;br /&gt;
Option1 Value&lt;br /&gt;
Option2 Name&lt;br /&gt;
Option2 Value&lt;br /&gt;
Option3 Name&lt;br /&gt;
Option3 Value&lt;br /&gt;
SKU&lt;br /&gt;
HS Code&lt;br /&gt;
COO&lt;br /&gt;
Location&lt;br /&gt;
Incoming&lt;br /&gt;
Unavailable&lt;br /&gt;
Committed&lt;br /&gt;
Available&lt;br /&gt;
On hand&lt;br /&gt;
Bin&lt;br /&gt;
Barcode&lt;br /&gt;
Grams&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory Tracker&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory Policy&lt;br /&gt;
Fulfillment Service&lt;br /&gt;
Price&lt;br /&gt;
Cost Price&lt;br /&gt;
Compare At Price&lt;br /&gt;
Discount&lt;br /&gt;
Instalments&lt;br /&gt;
Free Shipping&lt;br /&gt;
Tax Free&lt;br /&gt;
No Shipping Required&lt;br /&gt;
Ship Separately&lt;br /&gt;
Length&lt;br /&gt;
Width&lt;br /&gt;
Height&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping Code&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; The &#039;&#039;&#039;Incoming&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Committed&#039;&#039;&#039; columns are exported for reference. They are not imported — an import updates &#039;&#039;&#039;Available&#039;&#039;&#039; only and leaves the existing unavailable and committed quantities unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields are explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The inventory.csv file explained ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;20&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;wikitable orders_explanation&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;HEADER&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
! &#039;&#039;&#039;WHAT IS IT?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Handle&#039;&#039;&#039; (Required when updating products. Not required when adding new products)&lt;br /&gt;
| The product handle is a unique identifier for a given product. The handle is used as part of the product&#039;s URL to identify that product. In the CSV file, each line must contain a Handle or Title.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;If the Handle is not provided, one is automatically generated from the Title&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usually used when importing new products. For referencing existing products, it is necessary to specify the Handle of the product. A product definition may take a number of records in the CSV file, and each of these lines will contain the product&#039;s Handle. When a different Handle is encountered, a new product is being defined.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The handle consists of lower-case letters and digits separated by dashes (&#039;-&#039;). No special characters or spaces are permitted. The handle must be unique for each product. The handle must start with an alphabetic character.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the following example, the handle is &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;a-green-t-shirt&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.myshop.com.au/products/a-green-t-shirt&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; (Required)&lt;br /&gt;
| The product&#039;s title.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Option1 Name&#039;&#039;&#039; (Required)&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the name of the default option that is used to distinguish a product&#039;s variations. For products with only single option, this should be left as &#039;Title&#039;. A value MUST be provided if a variation is being defined.  e.g. Title, Size, Colour, Name, Material, Style.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Option1 Value&#039;&#039;&#039; (Required)&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the value used to distinguish between a product variations. A value MUST be provided if a variation is being defined. If you have only one option, this should be set as &#039;Default&#039;.  e.g. Small, Medium, Large, Blue, Green, Yellow&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Option2 Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| If a product has a second option used to distinguish a product&#039;s variations, then enter the name of the option here.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Option2 Value&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| If a product has a second option, enter the value of the option for this variation here.  A value MUST be provided if a variation is being defined.  e.g. Small, Medium, Large, Blue, Green, Yellow &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Option3 Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| If a product has a third option used to distinguish a product&#039;s variations, enter the name of the option here.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Option3 Value&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| If a product has a third option, enter the value of the option for this variation here. A value MUST be provided if a variation is being defined.  e.g. Small, Medium, Large, Blue, Green, Yellow&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;SKU&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) identifier used to identify the variation.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;HS Code&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The HS Code (Harmonized System Code) column is used to estimate duties and taxes for international customers. This column is optional and can be left blank. The code must be exactly 6 digits, and ideally one of the official HS codes. Leading zeros are significant, so when editing the code in a spreadsheet, format the column as Text to stop them being removed. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;COO&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The COO (Country of Origin) column is used to estimate duties and taxes for international customers. This column is optional and can be left blank. The exported file contains the country name, and on import either the full country name or the two letter ISO-3166-1 alpha-2 code (e.g. AU) is accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The names of each of your locations. The location row is case sensitive and must be the name of one of your locations. The inventory for each location is displayed in the corresponding location row. For each variant, include a row for every location where you want to update inventory. Remove any other location rows. Use &#039;Default&#039; if multiple locations are not enabled for your store.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Incoming&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Inventory that&#039;s on its way to your location. Incoming inventory isn&#039;t available to sell until it&#039;s been received.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Inventory that is on hand but can&#039;t be sold, such as damaged, quality-control or safety-stock units. The exported total is for reference; the individual reasons are managed from the variation&#039;s Locations section.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Committed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of units that are part of a placed order but aren&#039;t fulfilled.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Available&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Inventory that you can sell. Available inventory isn&#039;t committed to any orders or reserved for any draft orders.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;On hand&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of units that you have at a location. On hand inventory is made up of the total of your Committed, Unavailable and Available inventory. The inventory values that you input can be positive, negative or 0. The number cannot include a decimal, such as 1.5. You can also enter &#039;&#039;&#039;not stocked&#039;&#039;&#039; to indicate that the product is never stocked at the location.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Bin&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The bin or location code that identifies where the variation is stored in your warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Barcode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The barcode (e.g. UPC or EAN) used to identify the variation. Use only numbers or characters, with no spaces. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Grams&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The weight of the variation in grams. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory Tracker&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Determines whether stock levels are tracked for the variation. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;spiffy&#039;&#039;&#039; to track stock levels, or leave this blank if you do not want to track stock for this variation. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory Policy&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Determines what happens when this variation is sold out. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;deny&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop selling, &#039;&#039;&#039;continue&#039;&#039;&#039; to allow back-orders, or &#039;&#039;&#039;archive&#039;&#039;&#039; to archive the product and stop selling. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Fulfillment Service&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The fulfillment service used to ship this variation. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;manual&#039;&#039;&#039; if you fulfill orders yourself. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Price&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The selling price of the variation. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Cost Price&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The cost (wholesale) price of the variation. This is used to calculate your profit when a sale is made. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Compare At Price&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The original price of the variation, used to display a strike-through price or to show a sale discount. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Discount&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The dollar amount discounted from the variation&#039;s price. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Instalments&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of instalments this variation can be paid in. The minimum is 1. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Free Shipping&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether this variation is eligible for free shipping. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;true&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;false&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Tax Free&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether this variation is exempt from taxes. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;true&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;false&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;No Shipping Required&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether this variation does not require shipping. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;true&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;false&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Ship Separately&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether this variation must ship separately from other items. Enter &#039;&#039;&#039;true&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;false&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Length&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The length of the variation, measured in the store&#039;s length unit. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The width of the variation, measured in the store&#039;s length unit. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The height of the variation, measured in the store&#039;s length unit. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Shipping Code&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The shipping code applied to this variation. The code must already be defined in one of your shipping rates.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10273</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10273"/>
		<updated>2026-10-19T04:01:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document unavailable inventory reasons and actions&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unavailable inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each location tracks four kinds of stock that are on hand but can&#039;t be sold. You manage them from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the Edit Variation window: click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; quantity for a location to open the breakdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The four reasons are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Damaged&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is damaged and can&#039;t be sold as-is.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Quality Control&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock that is waiting for a quality check before it can be sold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Safety Stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — stock held back as a buffer to guard against overselling.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039; — anything else that is on hand but not for sale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the selected reason you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — set stock aside from the location&#039;s available stock. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Available&#039;&#039;&#039; — put the stock back on sale. On hand does not change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — record stock that is physically present but was not in the system. On hand increases.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove / dispose&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove stock that is no longer physically present. On hand decreases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Move from Available&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a safety-stock buffer. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Add unrecorded stock&#039;&#039;&#039; only when the units really exist but have not been counted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On hand is the total physical stock at the location: Available + Committed + Unavailable. The &#039;&#039;&#039;History&#039;&#039;&#039; link in the same window shows recent adjustments, including who made them and why.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10272</id>
		<title>Purchase Orders</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10272"/>
		<updated>2026-10-14T00:40:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document items, ordering, closing, emailing, PDF, duplicate, timeline, transfers and exchange rates&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Purchase Orders let you order stock from your suppliers and receive it into one of your store&#039;s locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase Orders are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Purchase Orders overview from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; page, or from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Products&#039;&#039;&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Purchase Orders overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview lists the purchase orders in your store. Each row shows the purchase order number, supplier, destination, status, received quantity, value and expected arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can have one of the following statuses:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Draft&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order is still being prepared and can be edited or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordered&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been placed with the supplier and is awaiting stock. The delivery details can still be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Partially Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — some of the ordered stock has been received. The delivery details can still be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — all of the ordered stock has been received.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closed&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating a purchase order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Purchase Order&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose the &#039;&#039;&#039;Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; and the &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination&#039;&#039;&#039; location the stock will be received into. You can also set the payment terms, supplier currency, exchange rate, expected arrival, carrier, tracking number, reference and a note. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Draft&#039;&#039;&#039; to create the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding items ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the order is a &#039;&#039;&#039;Draft&#039;&#039;&#039;, choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Item&#039;&#039;&#039; to open the product picker, find the product and variation you are ordering, and add it to the order. Each line records the supplier&#039;s SKU for the item, the quantity ordered and the unit cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change a line, click the pencil icon to edit its supplier SKU, quantity or cost, then click the check to save. Click the trash icon to remove the line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing a purchase order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a purchase order is a &#039;&#039;&#039;Draft&#039;&#039;&#039;, open it and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Purchase Order&#039;&#039;&#039; to change any of its details, including the supplier, destination, payment terms, supplier currency, exchange rate, carrier, tracking number, reference, expected arrival and note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the order has been placed, the supplier, destination, payment terms, currency and exchange rate are fixed, but you can still correct the delivery details. Open the purchase order, choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Purchase Order&#039;&#039;&#039; and update the expected arrival, carrier, tracking number, reference or note. This is useful when a delivery is delayed or the tracking number is only known after dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;Received&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Closed&#039;&#039;&#039; purchase order can no longer be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A draft that is no longer needed can be deleted with &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete this Purchase Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. An order that has been placed cannot be deleted, only closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Placing the order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the order is complete, choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Mark as Ordered&#039;&#039;&#039;. This records that the order has been placed with the supplier and locks in the exchange rate for the order. You can only mark an order as ordered once it has at least one item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving stock ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a delivery arrives, open the purchase order and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive Stock&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the quantity received for each line and the actual unit cost invoiced for this delivery, then confirm. The stock is added to the order&#039;s destination location, and the received quantity and status are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each delivery is recorded as a separate receipt, so an order can be received in full or in part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reversing a receipt ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A receipt can be reversed if it was keyed incorrectly. On the purchase order, find the receipt in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Receipts&#039;&#039;&#039; list and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Reverse&#039;&#039;&#039;, then confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reversing a receipt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* removes the received quantity from the destination location,&lt;br /&gt;
* returns the purchase order&#039;s received quantity and status to what they were before the receipt, and&lt;br /&gt;
* restores the product&#039;s cost to the value it had before the receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Receipts cannot be edited or deleted, so a correction always leaves both the original and the reversing entry in the receipt history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can only reverse the most recent receipt for a product. If a later receipt exists for the same product, reverse that one first. A receipt also cannot be reversed if the stock it added is no longer at the location (for example, it has since been sold or moved); adjust the stock first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Closing a purchase order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an order has been placed, choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Close Purchase Order&#039;&#039;&#039; to close it. You can close an order while it is &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordered&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Partially Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — for example, when the outstanding stock will not arrive. A fully &#039;&#039;&#039;Received&#039;&#039;&#039; order is already complete. A closed purchase order is final and can no longer be edited or received against.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Emailing the purchase order to the supplier ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Email to Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; to send the purchase order to the supplier. You can change the recipient&#039;s email address, the subject and the message, and the purchase order PDF is attached automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Printing or downloading a purchase order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Print / Download PDF&#039;&#039;&#039; to open the purchase order as a PDF in a new tab, ready to print or save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Duplicating a purchase order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Duplicate&#039;&#039;&#039; to create a copy of the purchase order as a new draft, with the same supplier, destination, payment terms, currency, reference, note and items. The new order starts with nothing received, so it is useful for reordering the same stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Supplier currency and exchange rates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order is priced in the supplier&#039;s currency. If that differs from your store&#039;s currency, enter an &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange Rate&#039;&#039;&#039; to your store currency, or leave it blank to use the automatic rate. The rate is locked in when you mark the order as ordered, and the order shows both the supplier currency total and the equivalent in your store currency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Timeline ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each purchase order has a &#039;&#039;&#039;Timeline&#039;&#039;&#039; showing its history — when it was created, ordered, edited, received and closed, and who made each change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Transfers ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If stock received against a purchase order is later moved to another location with a transfer, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Transfers&#039;&#039;&#039; list on the purchase order shows those transfers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filtering purchase orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the search box and the filter panel on the right to narrow the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Status ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a status from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Order status&#039;&#039;&#039; list to show only orders in that state. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;All purchase orders&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the status filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a supplier name, reference or tracking number in the search box to find matching orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Custom Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add filters for a specific supplier or destination:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Custom Search&#039;&#039;&#039; panel, choose either &#039;&#039;&#039;Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the supplier or location you want to filter by.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add filter&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chosen filter is added to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list, and the list updates to show only matching orders. You can add both a supplier filter and a destination filter at the same time; the list then shows only orders that match both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a filter, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Purchase Orders per page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many purchase orders are shown on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10271</id>
		<title>Locations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Locations&amp;diff=10271"/>
		<updated>2026-10-14T00:25:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Create article describing the Locations feature&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locations are the places where you store inventory that can be used to fulfil orders. A location can be a warehouse, a retail store, or any other place you hold stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Locations are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Locations page from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Locations page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page lists the locations in your store. Each row shows the location&#039;s name, address and whether its inventory is available for sale online.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of the list you can see how many locations you are using and how many your plan allows. Drag a location by its handle to change the order in which locations are used to fulfil orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each location you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* click the row to edit its name and address,&lt;br /&gt;
* click the gear icon to configure pickup and local delivery,&lt;br /&gt;
* click &#039;&#039;&#039;Disable&#039;&#039;&#039; to stop using it, or &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again, or&lt;br /&gt;
* click the trash icon to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Location&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter the location&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Location&#039;&#039;&#039;. A location records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Name&#039;&#039;&#039; — a name such as &amp;quot;Main Warehouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory at this location is available for sale online&#039;&#039;&#039; — when ticked, the stock at this location can be used to fulfil online orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Point of Sale Location&#039;&#039;&#039; — link this location to the matching location in your Point of Sale system so inventory stays in sync. This is only shown when a Point of Sale system is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s street address, city, state, country and postal code.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Email&#039;&#039;&#039; — the location&#039;s contact details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The default location ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default location is used when no other location is specified. Only locations whose inventory is available for sale online can be set as the default. The store owner can change the default location at the bottom of the Locations page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order allocation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an online order is placed, Spiffy Stores decides which location fulfils each item. Only locations that are enabled and available for sale online are considered. The store owner can choose how the location is chosen at the bottom of the Locations page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default location first&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Most stock&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location holding the most stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location priority order&#039;&#039;&#039; — use the order of the locations in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closest to customer&#039;&#039;&#039; — prefer the location closest to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimise splits&#039;&#039;&#039; to prefer a single location that can fulfil the whole order, even if it ranks lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pickup and local delivery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the gear icon beside a location to configure how it fulfils orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Location Pickup&#039;&#039;&#039; — let customers pick up their orders at this location. You can offer pickup anywhere or only for selected postcodes, and add opening hours and collection instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Delivery&#039;&#039;&#039; — deliver orders to customers directly from this location. You can deliver anywhere or only to selected postcodes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; to save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Disabling and deleting locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location that is no longer in use can be disabled. Its inventory is excluded from online fulfilment and from pickup and delivery, but its details and stock levels are kept. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; to use it again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A location can be deleted from the list. Deleting a location removes the stock levels held at it; purchase orders, transfers and receipt history that refer to it are kept. A deleted location cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Suppliers&amp;diff=10270</id>
		<title>Suppliers</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Suppliers&amp;diff=10270"/>
		<updated>2026-10-13T22:13:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Create article describing the Suppliers feature&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Suppliers are the companies you buy stock from. Each supplier records the contact details, address, payment terms, currency and tax number used when you order stock from them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppliers are selected on purchase orders, so you can record where stock is ordered from and receive it as it arrives. You can open the Suppliers overview from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Suppliers overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview lists the suppliers in your store. Each row shows the supplier&#039;s company name, location, contact, phone number and email address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click a row to open the supplier. Use the search box and the &#039;&#039;&#039;Suppliers per page&#039;&#039;&#039; options on the right to find suppliers, and click a column heading to sort the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a supplier ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add a Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; on the right, enter the supplier&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039;. The supplier records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039; — the supplier&#039;s company name.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Contact&#039;&#039;&#039; — the first and last name of the person you deal with at the supplier. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Address&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; — how to contact the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Address&#039;&#039;&#039; — the supplier&#039;s mailing address.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Terms&#039;&#039;&#039; — the terms agreed with the supplier, such as 30 days.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ABN/VAT&#039;&#039;&#039; — the supplier&#039;s tax registration number.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Currency&#039;&#039;&#039; — the currency used when pricing this supplier&#039;s purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewing and editing a supplier ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open a supplier to view their details. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;edit&#039;&#039;&#039; to change any of the supplier&#039;s details, then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Notes&#039;&#039;&#039; field records any comments about the supplier and their orders. You can update the notes directly on the supplier page without entering edit mode — click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Notes&#039;&#039;&#039; to store them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deleting a supplier ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A supplier can be deleted from the supplier page, as long as no purchase orders or receipt history exist for them. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete this Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; and confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Creating_a_data_feed_for_Google_Merchant_Center&amp;diff=10269</id>
		<title>Creating a data feed for Google Merchant Center</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Creating_a_data_feed_for_Google_Merchant_Center&amp;diff=10269"/>
		<updated>2026-10-13T03:44:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Update Google feed details: product categories, sale prices, images and shipping note&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Setting up a product data feed for your products is a great way to get added exposure for your online store by syndicating them to a variety of these shopping portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our Google Merchant Center feed is the same format as the feed you would also need for Pinterest, so you can use the feed for both or either of these services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Product data feeds are updated whenever you make a change to your products, so you can be sure that they&#039;re up to date.  To create a data feed for [http://www.google.com/merchants Google Merchant Center] and/or [https://help.pinterest.com/en/business/article/before-you-get-started-with-catalogs Pinterest] follow the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;IMPORTANT!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You need to ensure that all products in your feed have a Barcode (UPC/EAN, ISBN) and SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) before submitting your data file Google Merchant Center.  If you don&#039;t do this, they will not appear in your feed, and they will not accept your submission!&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step 1 - Create a collection of products ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;126px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Shopping-com-data-feed-01.png|Collections Section&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly we need to have a list of products to send to [http://www.google.com/merchants Google Merchant Center] or [https://pinterest.com Pinterest].  To create this, you&#039;ll need to create a collection that contains all of the products you want in your data feed.  You can create a [[Standard Collections|Standard Collection]] or a [[Super Collections|Super Collection]]. This can be done in the &amp;quot;Collections&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have created a collection for another provider (for example Shopping.com), or you just want to have all of your products in your feed, you can skip this step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step 2 - Creating your data feed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Google-data-feed-01.png|Creating your data feed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have created your collection, go to the &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox, and click the &amp;quot;Activate&amp;quot; button in the Google Merchant Center section. If you can only see a feed for Facebook, it means that you&#039;re on a plan that doesn&#039;t include feeds for other services. You should consider upgrading your plan if you want to take advantage of more advanced features like data feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a name for your feed.  It&#039;s not used anywhere except for your reference&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the collection you created in Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Activate&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step 3 (Google Merchant Center) - Adding your data feed on the Google Merchant Center website ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Google-data-feed-02.png|Adding your data feed on the Google Merchant Center website&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have signed up for a Google Merchant Center account, you can then add your data feed.  In the &amp;quot;Data feeds&amp;quot; section of the Merchant Centre, click the &amp;quot;New Data Feed&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;clear: both&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;176px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Google-data-feed-03.png|Data feed options&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the next screen, choose the country you are based in, enter &amp;quot;data-feed.xml&amp;quot; for your filename, and click &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;clear: both&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Google-data-feed-04.png|Click &amp;quot;Create schedule&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &amp;quot;Create schedule&amp;quot; link next to your data-feed.xml file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;clear: both&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Google-data-feed-05.png|Scheduled upload&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Popup window, choose &amp;quot;Weekly&amp;quot;, select your timezone, and then paste in the URL of your data feed that you have copied from the &amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.  In most browsers, you can right-click on the URL and copy it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Username and password should be left blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have done this, click the &amp;quot;Schedule and fetch now&amp;quot; button.  Google will fetch your XML file.  If there are any issues, it&#039;s likely because there are issues with product data.  You will need to check any products in your store&#039;s Toolbox that you receive warnings about to make sure that they all have a Barcode (UPC/EAN, ISBN) and SKU (Stock Keeping Unit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== About your Google data feed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your feed is rebuilt automatically whenever you change your products. Each product in the feed includes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A plain-text title and description (HTML is removed)&lt;br /&gt;
* The price, plus a separate sale price when the product is on sale&lt;br /&gt;
* Product identifiers - GTIN (Barcode), brand and MPN (SKU)&lt;br /&gt;
* The Google product category, taken from each product&#039;s Product Category&lt;br /&gt;
* Every product image (one main image plus additional images)&lt;br /&gt;
* Availability, condition, size, colour, material and shipping weight&lt;br /&gt;
* A product group ID that links variants of the same product together&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;#FF6B00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: Shipping costs are not included in the feed. You must configure your shipping settings in Google Merchant Center itself. In Australia, Google requires a shipping cost for Shopping ads and free listings, so be sure to set this up in your Merchant Center account.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step 3 (Pinterest) - Adding your data feed to Pinterest ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pinterest have an excellent tutorial on adding your feed here -&amp;gt; https://help.pinterest.com/en/business/article/data-source-ingestion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Common Errors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;#FF6B00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insufficient product identifiers: Missing two out of three attributes [GTIN, brand, mpn]&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The brand field is already populated, so this means that you have not entered a Barcode for this product.  You will need to edit the product in your store&#039;s Toolbox and ensure it has a Barcode number entered in the &amp;quot;Barcode&amp;quot; field.  You can also use the [[Bulk Product Export and Import|Import/Export]] feature to update your products if your store is on the Business Plan or above.  You can enter a GTIN, UPC, EAN or ISBN here. More information about a GTIN can be found at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Global_Trade_Item_Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;#FF6B00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Missing required attribute: id&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This means that you have not entered a SKU for this product. You will need to edit the product in your store&#039;s Toolbox and ensure it has a SKU entered in the SKU field.  You can also use the [[Bulk Product Export and Import|Import/Export]] feature to update your products if your store is on the Business Plan or above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;#FF6B00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Missing recommended attribute: google product category&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your feed now includes the Google product category for each product, taken from the product&#039;s Product Category (the taxonomy path selected for its Type). If you see this warning, the product has no Product Category set. Edit the product (or its Type) in your store&#039;s Toolbox and choose a Product Category, or set a default category for the feed when editing it. That default is used for any products that don&#039;t have their own category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;#FF6B00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Website URL not claimed&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to claim your website in the General Settings section of Google Merchant Center.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Product_Management&amp;diff=10268</id>
		<title>Bulk Product Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Product_Management&amp;diff=10268"/>
		<updated>2026-10-12T05:40:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document the new bulk product actions: Set Product Category, Type and Vendor&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Image:Bulk-product-management.jpg&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managing products one at a time can be time-consuming, particularly for larger catalogues. Spiffy Stores includes a range of bulk management tools that allow you to update multiple products or variants simultaneously, helping you maintain consistency while significantly reducing the time spent on routine administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bulk actions are available from both the &#039;&#039;&#039;Your Products&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory&#039;&#039;&#039; pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process for using bulk actions is the same throughout the administration area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the search and filter options to display the products or variants you want to update.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the required items using the checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the appropriate action from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Bulk Actions&#039;&#039;&#039; dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any additional information required for that action.&lt;br /&gt;
# Confirm the update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the selected products or variants are modified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Benefits of Bulk Product Management ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bulk actions provide a fast and efficient way to maintain your catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Save time&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update dozens or even hundreds of products or variants in a single operation instead of editing each item individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Reduce errors&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply the same settings consistently across multiple items, reducing manual mistakes and ensuring uniform product data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Stay organised&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep collections, tags, shipping information and fulfilment settings aligned across your catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Work more efficiently&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combine bulk actions with the product search and filtering tools to target exactly the products or variants that require updating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product Actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
Add one or more tags to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tags can be used to organise products, improve searching, assist with merchandising, or drive theme and application functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding tags:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Existing tags are preserved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Only the new tags are added.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicate tags are ignored automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
Remove one or more tags from all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ending promotional campaigns.&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing outdated classifications.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cleaning up product data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the specified tags are removed. Any other tags assigned to the products remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add to Collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the selected products to a standard collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the collection you want to use from the dropdown list, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected product is added to the chosen collection without affecting any of its existing collection memberships.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Organising seasonal or promotional products.&lt;br /&gt;
* Preparing products for a sale or marketing campaign.&lt;br /&gt;
* Grouping related products for navigation or reporting.&lt;br /&gt;
* Adding newly imported products to an existing collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Products can belong to more than one standard collection, so adding products to a collection does not remove them from any other collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove from Collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the selected products from a standard collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the collection from which the products should be removed, then confirm the bulk action. Only the selected collection membership is removed. The products themselves are not deleted, and their membership of any other collections is unaffected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing products from expired promotions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reorganising catalogue categories.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cleaning up seasonal collections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Correcting products that were assigned to the wrong collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Shipping Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a shipping code to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping codes are used by your configured shipping rates to calculate delivery costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using this action allows you to quickly ensure that products sharing the same fulfilment requirements are charged correctly without editing each product individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Product Category ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a standardised product category to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a category using the searchable list, then confirm the bulk action. Product categories make it easier to publish your products on other platforms, such as the Facebook Product Catalog. Products without a category may be excluded from those feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product&#039;s category is stored with its product type, so setting a category does not change the product&#039;s Product Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Product Type ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a product type to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a type from the dropdown list, then confirm the bulk action. Examples of product types include &amp;quot;PC Computer Games&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Scarves&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Garden Hoses&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The category assigned to each selected product is preserved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Product Vendor ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a product vendor to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a vendor from the dropdown list, then confirm the bulk action. The vendor is the creator or manufacturer of the product, such as IBM or Adidas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only vendors that already exist in your shop can be selected. To use a new vendor, add it to a product first and it will then appear in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Publish Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Publish the selected products, making them available to customers through your online store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Products must also be included in the appropriate collections, menus or other store navigation before customers can easily find them. Publishing a product does not automatically add it to a collection or navigation menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action is useful after:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing or creating a group of new products.&lt;br /&gt;
* Completing product descriptions, images and pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Preparing products in advance of a new range or campaign.&lt;br /&gt;
* Restoring products that were previously hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before publishing products in bulk, check that their prices, inventory settings, images, shipping details and descriptions are complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hide Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Hide the selected products from your online store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden products remain in your administration area and can still be edited, managed and published again later. Hiding a product does not delete its product information, variants, images or inventory records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action is useful when:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A product is temporarily unavailable.&lt;br /&gt;
* Product information needs to be reviewed or updated.&lt;br /&gt;
* A seasonal product should be removed from sale.&lt;br /&gt;
* A product is being prepared for a future release.&lt;br /&gt;
* You want to stop selling a product without permanently deleting it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Hiding and showing Products]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Permanently delete the selected products from your shop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deleting products is a destructive action and should be used carefully. Product information, variants, images and related catalogue data may no longer be available after deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before deleting products in bulk:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Confirm that the correct products have been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
* Consider hiding products instead if they may be sold again.&lt;br /&gt;
* Export or retain any product information that may be required later.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check whether the products are still referenced by collections, navigation, promotions or external links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this action for products that are no longer required and will not need to be restored. For products that are only temporarily unavailable, use &#039;&#039;&#039;Hide Products&#039;&#039;&#039; instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Variant Actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Shipping Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a shipping code to all selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping codes are used by your configured shipping rates to calculate delivery costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using this action allows you to quickly ensure that products sharing the same fulfilment requirements are charged correctly without editing each variant individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Location Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a warehouse or storage location code to selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location codes help staff:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Locate stock more quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Improve picking accuracy.&lt;br /&gt;
* Speed up packing and fulfilment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Weight ===&lt;br /&gt;
Update the weight of multiple variants at once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weights are entered using your shop&#039;s configured weight unit (for example kilograms or pounds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accurate product weights help ensure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Correct shipping charges.&lt;br /&gt;
* Accurate carrier calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced shipping discrepancies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Dimensions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the width, length and height for multiple variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintaining accurate dimensions allows shipping carriers to correctly calculate volumetric weight for larger or bulky items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps avoid incorrect shipping charges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Ship Separately ===&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the requirement for selected variants to be shipped in a separate package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable this option for products that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Cannot safely be packed with other items.&lt;br /&gt;
* Require their own shipping carton.&lt;br /&gt;
* Need special handling during transport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Free Shipping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable free shipping for the selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When free shipping is enabled, the selected variants are treated as free-shipping items when the shop calculates the available shipping rates. Other products or variants in the same order may still attract shipping charges according to your configured shipping rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Running shipping promotions on selected products or variants.&lt;br /&gt;
* Offering free delivery for specific product ranges.&lt;br /&gt;
* Applying the same free-shipping setting across all variants of a product.&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing free shipping when a promotion finishes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review your shop&#039;s shipping-rate configuration after making this change to ensure that mixed orders containing both free-shipping and normally charged items behave as expected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stock at Location ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark the selected variants as stocked at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the location from the list of enabled locations, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected variant is marked as stocked at that location, so it becomes available to the shop&#039;s order allocation and appears when the inventory list is filtered by that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only inventory-tracked variants are affected. Variants that do not track stock are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stocking a variant at a location does not change any existing stock quantities. Use the location&#039;s stock controls on the product page to adjust the quantity held there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unstock at Location ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark the selected variants as no longer stocked at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the location from the list, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected variant&#039;s stock record at that location is removed, so the variant no longer appears when the inventory list is filtered by that location. All locations are listed, including disabled ones, so stock can be cleared from a location that is no longer in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A variant can only be unstocked from a location when every quantity at that location is zero. Variants that still hold stock at the location are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated and how many were skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unstocking permanently removes the variant&#039;s stock record and its movement history at that location. If you may need that history, adjust or transfer the stock to zero first and export any records you need to keep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Further Reference ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Hiding and showing Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Product_data_feeds&amp;diff=10267</id>
		<title>Product data feeds</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Product_data_feeds&amp;diff=10267"/>
		<updated>2026-10-12T03:31:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Data feed1.png|Product data feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the challenges of running an online store is to get your products and services known, so that potential customers can find your online store and hopefully make a purchase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that simply creating an online store and then sitting back and waiting for orders to start flowing in is not a good strategy. Without marketing and the promotion of your store, you will not make any significant sales.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the more obvious marketing routes such as getting listed by the various search engines and purchasing search engine based advertising, another popular technique is to list your products using a comparison shopping site or portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comparison shopping sites aggregate products from many different online stores which allows customers to easily find the right product. Although your products are being listed along with your competitors, this technique has the advantage that your products are going to reach a very large audience of potential customers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This large audience comes from not only the vistors to the portal site that you have subscribed to, but also from a large number of affiliate sites that are often associated with the major comparison shopping sites. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up a product data feed for your products is a great way to get this added exposure for your online store by syndicating them to a variety of these shopping portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product data feed is a means by which you can publish frequently updated data in a consistent data format. With product listings, that data is the product name, price, description, manufacturer, photo URLs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the data is in a standard format, it can be used by other sites to populate their databases of products on your behalf, automating the otherwise manual task of data entry that would be required to place your products on those sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating a Product Data Feed  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manage your store&#039;s product data feeds by navigating to &amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; in your Spiffy Store Toolbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find a list of supported product data feeds. If you can only see a feed for Facebook, it means that you&#039;re on a plan that doesn&#039;t include feeds for other services.  You should consider upgrading your plan if you want to take advantage of more advanced features like data feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, Spiffy Stores supports feeds for the following services: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Facebook|Facebook]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Google Merchant Center|Google Merchant Center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Shopping.com|Shopping.com]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Getprice.com.au|Getprice.com.au]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Google Merchant Center|Pinterest]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.shopprice.com.au Shopprice.com.au]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Rakuten LinkShare|Rakuten LinkShare]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Activating the Product Data Feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Data feed2.png|Activating a product data feed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected the shopping portal service that you are interested, click on the &amp;quot;Activate&amp;quot; button to create a product data feed for this service. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the form you can create a data feed by giving it a name, and then selecting which products will appear in the product data feed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose either to include all products in your store, which is usually the best choice, or alternatively you can choose to restrict your data feed to a specific product collection. If you want to tailor the selection of products that you are including, then create either a standard or a super collection and add the required products to that collection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Your products must have a unique SKU in order to identify what product is being included in the data feed. If you have not defined an SKU, then that product will not be listed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have finished entering the required information, please click on the &#039;Activate&#039; button to create the product data feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Product Data Feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Data feed3.png|Product data feed status&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a product feed has been created, you can see its status in the Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status fields will show you the product data feed title, the included products and most importantly, the URL of the data feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to notify the portal service that they should use this URL as the source of the product data for your store. You may need to login to your Merchant Account for the portal service to update the feed URL, or in some cases you may need to send the URL by email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the URL, you will be able to see the output from the product data feed, and verify that the generated data is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing a Product Data Feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to make changes to the product data feed, you can edit it at any time. If you edit and change the title of the data feed, then a new URL will be generated. You will need to notify your portal service of the updated URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, if you want to terminate a data feed, you can click on the &#039;Deactivate&#039; button to delete the data feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please ensure that you notify the portal service that you are deleting the URL so that they can cancel your service and so avoid calling a URL that no longer exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Indicating a Product&#039;s Condition ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some product data feeds (such as Facebook, Google Merchant Center and Klaviyo) include a &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for each product. This tells the shopping service whether the item is new or used. It&#039;s important if you sell vintage, antique or second-hand goods, because listing a used item as new can breach the shopping service&#039;s policies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spiffy Stores takes the condition from a product variation option called &amp;quot;Condition&amp;quot;. To set it up:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the product in the &amp;quot;Products&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Product Variations&amp;quot; section, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;(edit titles)&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Edit Variation Titles&amp;quot; window, click &#039;&#039;&#039;(rename)&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose &amp;quot;Condition&amp;quot; from the drop-down menu (or type it in), then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Options&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the product&#039;s variation to open the &amp;quot;Edit Product Variation&amp;quot; window, type the condition into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; field (for example &amp;quot;Used&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Antique&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Vintage&amp;quot;), then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Variation&#039;&#039;&#039;. If the product has more than one variation, set the condition for each one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any value other than &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; is reported to the shopping service as &amp;quot;used&amp;quot;. If the value is &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;, or the product has no &amp;quot;Condition&amp;quot; option, it is reported as &amp;quot;new&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;IMPORTANT!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Make sure the condition is accurate. Listing a used item as &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; may cause your products to be rejected by the shopping service.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Product_data_feeds&amp;diff=10266</id>
		<title>Product data feeds</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Product_data_feeds&amp;diff=10266"/>
		<updated>2026-10-12T03:27:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document how to set a product&amp;#039;s condition for product data feeds&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Data feed1.png|Product data feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of the challenges of running an online store is to get your products and services known, so that potential customers can find your online store and hopefully make a purchase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that simply creating an online store and then sitting back and waiting for orders to start flowing in is not a good strategy. Without marketing and the promotion of your store, you will not make any significant sales.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from the more obvious marketing routes such as getting listed by the various search engines and purchasing search engine based advertising, another popular technique is to list your products using a comparison shopping site or portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comparison shopping sites aggregate products from many different online stores which allows customers to easily find the right product. Although your products are being listed along with your competitors, this technique has the advantage that your products are going to reach a very large audience of potential customers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This large audience comes from not only the vistors to the portal site that you have subscribed to, but also from a large number of affiliate sites that are often associated with the major comparison shopping sites. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up a product data feed for your products is a great way to get this added exposure for your online store by syndicating them to a variety of these shopping portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product data feed is a means by which you can publish frequently updated data in a consistent data format. With product listings, that data is the product name, price, description, manufacturer, photo URLs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the data is in a standard format, it can be used by other sites to populate their databases of products on your behalf, automating the otherwise manual task of data entry that would be required to place your products on those sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating a Product Data Feed  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can manage your store&#039;s product data feeds by navigating to &amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; in your Spiffy Store Toolbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find a list of supported product data feeds. If you can only see a feed for Facebook, it means that you&#039;re on a plan that doesn&#039;t include feeds for other services.  You should consider upgrading your plan if you want to take advantage of more advanced features like data feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, Spiffy Stores supports feeds for the following services: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Shopping.com|Shopping.com]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.myshopping.com.au Myshopping.com.au] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Getprice.com.au|Getprice.com.au]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Google Merchant Center|Google Merchant Center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Google Merchant Center|Pinterest]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.shopprice.com.au Shopprice.com.au]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Rakuten LinkShare|Rakuten LinkShare]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating a data feed for Facebook|Facebook]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Activating the Product Data Feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Data feed2.png|Activating a product data feed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected the shopping portal service that you are interested, click on the &amp;quot;Activate&amp;quot; button to create a product data feed for this service. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the form you can create a data feed by giving it a name, and then selecting which products will appear in the product data feed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose either to include all products in your store, which is usually the best choice, or alternatively you can choose to restrict your data feed to a specific product collection. If you want to tailor the selection of products that you are including, then create either a standard or a super collection and add the required products to that collection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Your products must have a unique SKU in order to identify what product is being included in the data feed. If you have not defined an SKU, then that product will not be listed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have finished entering the required information, please click on the &#039;Activate&#039; button to create the product data feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Product Data Feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Data feed3.png|Product data feed status&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a product feed has been created, you can see its status in the Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status fields will show you the product data feed title, the included products and most importantly, the URL of the data feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to notify the portal service that they should use this URL as the source of the product data for your store. You may need to login to your Merchant Account for the portal service to update the feed URL, or in some cases you may need to send the URL by email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the URL, you will be able to see the output from the product data feed, and verify that the generated data is correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managing a Product Data Feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to make changes to the product data feed, you can edit it at any time. If you edit and change the title of the data feed, then a new URL will be generated. You will need to notify your portal service of the updated URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, if you want to terminate a data feed, you can click on the &#039;Deactivate&#039; button to delete the data feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please ensure that you notify the portal service that you are deleting the URL so that they can cancel your service and so avoid calling a URL that no longer exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Indicating a Product&#039;s Condition ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some product data feeds (such as Facebook, Google Merchant Center and Klaviyo) include a &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for each product. This tells the shopping service whether the item is new or used. It&#039;s important if you sell vintage, antique or second-hand goods, because listing a used item as new can breach the shopping service&#039;s policies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spiffy Stores takes the condition from a product variation option called &amp;quot;Condition&amp;quot;. To set it up:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the product in the &amp;quot;Products&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Product Variations&amp;quot; section, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;(edit titles)&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Edit Variation Titles&amp;quot; window, click &#039;&#039;&#039;(rename)&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose &amp;quot;Condition&amp;quot; from the drop-down menu (or type it in), then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Options&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the product&#039;s variation to open the &amp;quot;Edit Product Variation&amp;quot; window, type the condition into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; field (for example &amp;quot;Used&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Antique&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Vintage&amp;quot;), then click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save Variation&#039;&#039;&#039;. If the product has more than one variation, set the condition for each one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any value other than &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; is reported to the shopping service as &amp;quot;used&amp;quot;. If the value is &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;, or the product has no &amp;quot;Condition&amp;quot; option, it is reported as &amp;quot;new&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;IMPORTANT!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Make sure the condition is accurate. Listing a used item as &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; may cause your products to be rejected by the shopping service.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Creating_a_data_feed_for_Facebook&amp;diff=10265</id>
		<title>Creating a data feed for Facebook</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Creating_a_data_feed_for_Facebook&amp;diff=10265"/>
		<updated>2026-10-12T03:21:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document the Default Product Category option&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;More detailed instructions can be found here -&amp;gt; [[Selling on Facebook ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To create a feed for Facebook, you&#039;ll need to do three things. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a new collection that contains all of the products you want to include in your product feed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your data feed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Add your data feed to Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Product data feeds are updated whenever you make a change to your products, so you can be sure that they&#039;re up to date.  To create a data feed for Facebook follow the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;IMPORTANT!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You need to ensure that all of your products have a unique SKU before submitting your data file to any provider.  If you don&#039;t do this, they will not accept your submission!&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step 1 - Create a collection of products ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;126px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Image:Shopping-com-data-feed-01.png|Collections Section&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly we need to have a list of products to send to Facebook.  To create this, you&#039;ll need to create a collection that contains all of the products you want in your data feed.  You can create a [[Standard Collections|Standard Collection]] or a [[Super Collections|Super Collection]].  This can be done in the &amp;quot;Collections&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have created a collection for another provider (for example Google Merchant Center) then you can skip this step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step 2 - Creating your data feed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;126px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Image:Shopping-com-data-feed-03.png|Creating your data feed&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have created your collection, go to the &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox, and click the &amp;quot;Activate&amp;quot; button in the Facebook section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a name for your feed. It&#039;s not used anywhere except for your reference&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the collection you created in Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Activate&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Step 3 - Adding your data feed on Facebook ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you&#039;re logged in to the appropriate section in Facebook&#039;s business section, paste in the URL of your data feed that you have copied from the &amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; section of your store&#039;s Toolbox. In most browsers, you can right-click on the URL and copy it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are contacted by Facebook about issues with your data feed, please let us know by forwarding us their email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting a default product category ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook requires every item in your catalogue to have a product category. Spiffy Stores sets one for you automatically:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If a product has its own &#039;&#039;&#039;Product Category&#039;&#039;&#039; (set on the product&#039;s details page), that category is sent to Facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a product doesn&#039;t have its own category, the feed&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Product Category&#039;&#039;&#039; is used instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* If neither is set, the product is left out of the feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set the default category, go to &amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;(edit)&#039;&#039;&#039; link next to the Facebook feed&#039;s title. In the &amp;quot;Product Feed Details&amp;quot; window, choose a category from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Product Category&#039;&#039;&#039; field and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Update&#039;&#039;&#039;. The field searches the standard product taxonomy as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chosen category is listed against &amp;quot;Default Product Category&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Marketing -&amp;gt; Product data feeds&amp;quot; page. Leave the field blank if you would rather exclude products that don&#039;t have their own category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;IMPORTANT!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Choose the closest matching category from the list. A category that isn&#039;t part of the standard product taxonomy may be rejected by Facebook.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10264</id>
		<title>Selling on Facebook</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10264"/>
		<updated>2026-10-12T00:30:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Creating a feed of your products for Facebook allows you to show your product catalogue in your own store on your Facebook business page. This allows users to easily discover your products, share them with friends, and click through to your store to order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook has over 1 billion active users every month and is the largest social network in the world. Users spend an average of 50 minutes a day using its services. The sheer size of the network — coupled with the level of engagement by its users — makes it an ideal marketplace to promote your products and raise brand awareness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no additional cost to use Facebook Shop and it is available on all Spiffy Stores Plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a Facebook shop setup with a different ecommerce provider, you will need to remove that catalogue altogether and create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 1 - Setting Up a Product Feed in Your Store==&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to your store&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a collection that will contain all of the products you want to show on Facebook.  It can be either a Standard Collection or a Super Collection.  A Super Collection makes it easier to set up. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU and a Standardized Product Category to show up in your feed. If a product has no Product Category, set a Default Product Category on the data feed so it is still included; products with neither are excluded from the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-001.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-002.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your data feed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-003.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-004.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-005.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.  Every product must also have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; When you create or edit a data feed, you can set a &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Product Category&#039;&#039;&#039;. Products that have no Product Category of their own use this category in the feed, so no product is left out. This is useful when your product types do not map cleanly to a standardized category.  &#039;&#039;&#039;Every product must also have a Standardized Product Category set, or the data feed must have a Default Product Category, to be included in the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 2 - Setting Up Your Facebook Store==&lt;br /&gt;
Before you begin...&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to Facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a Facebook business page for your store (if you haven&#039;t already).&lt;br /&gt;
# Your account must have an admin page role for the Facebook business page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Facebook page must have a phone number, Privacy Policy link, and a street address.  You&#039;re able to hide your street address and it won&#039;t affect your store.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done the above, follow the step by step below.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your [https://www.facebook.com/commerce_manager/onboarding_landing Facebook Commerce Manager], review the information, and click the &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Checkout on another website&amp;quot; and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-002.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For your sales channel, choose your Facebook page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-003.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# If you already have a business suite login, choose that, or create a new Business Account.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-004.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Review and agree to the seller agreement and click &amp;quot;Finish Setup&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-005.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Your shop has now been created.  Click the &amp;quot;Add Items&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-006.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 3 - Connecting Your Data Feed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: red; font-size: 1.1em; font-weight: bold;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Please note that Facebook have made a number of changes to these pages, with some items being renamed and moved around onto different pages.. As such, the images we have included here might be slightly out of date, although the general approach remains unchanged. We recommend you refer to the official Facebook documentation in order to get the most recent updates on how to add data feeds to your Facebook Product Catalog.&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2284463181837648?id=725943027795860 About scheduled data feed uploads for catalogs]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Under &amp;quot;Catalogue&amp;quot; on the left, click &amp;quot;Data Sources&amp;quot;, and then click the &amp;quot;Add products&amp;quot; button at the top right of the page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-007.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# From the drop-down, select &amp;quot;Data Feed&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-009.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Scheduled Feed&amp;quot;, and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-010.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Go back to the &amp;quot;Product Data Feeds&amp;quot; page in your Spiffy Store, copy the URL of your feed from your store, and paste it into the &amp;quot;Data feed URL&amp;quot; field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-12.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Clear out any &amp;quot;Data feed URL login&amp;quot; details.  They are not required.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-011.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Choose the schedule that your feed should update your catalogue.  We recommend this is set to &amp;quot;Daily&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-012.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Name your data feed&lt;br /&gt;
## Make sure the currency matches the currency of your Spiffy Store&lt;br /&gt;
## When you&#039;re sure you have all of the details correct, click the &amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-013.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Facebook should start importing your products.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Importing your products may take a while, but you can safely click the &amp;quot;View Products&amp;quot; button to see the products that have been imported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 4 - Final Setup Steps==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your products are all imported, refer to Facebook&#039;s Instructions on [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/610592986219839?id=1077620002609475 Customising your Facebook store] and [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2658959294372394?id=1077620002609475 Setting up product collections in Facebook].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Guidelines for Listing Products in your Facebook Shop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook needs the following to set up your Shop:&lt;br /&gt;
* your business email address&lt;br /&gt;
* your business phone number&lt;br /&gt;
* the Facebook business page you want to connect to your Facebook Shop&lt;br /&gt;
* the URL of your storefront Terms of Service (usually your shipping and returns policy)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every product will need the following to be accepted by Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
* A unique SKU&lt;br /&gt;
* A Standardized Product Category, or a Default Product Category set on the data feed (products with neither are excluded from the feed)&lt;br /&gt;
* The product needs to be in stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Steps==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set up Shoppable Posts on Instagram]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1665120490435542 Share your products on Facebook]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10263</id>
		<title>Selling on Facebook</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10263"/>
		<updated>2026-10-12T00:28:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Creating a feed of your products for Facebook allows you to show your product catalogue in your own store on your Facebook business page. This allows users to easily discover your products, share them with friends, and click through to your store to order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook has over 1 billion active users every month and is the largest social network in the world. Users spend an average of 50 minutes a day using its services. The sheer size of the network — coupled with the level of engagement by its users — makes it an ideal marketplace to promote your products and raise brand awareness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no additional cost to use Facebook Shop and it is available on all Spiffy Stores Plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a Facebook shop setup with a different ecommerce provider, you will need to remove that catalogue altogether and create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 1 - Setting Up a Product Feed in Your Store==&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to your store&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a collection that will contain all of the products you want to show on Facebook.  It can be either a Standard Collection or a Super Collection.  A Super Collection makes it easier to set up. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU and a Standardized Product Category to show up in your feed. If a product has no Product Category, set a Default Product Category on the data feed so it is still included; products with neither are excluded from the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-001.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-002.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your data feed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-003.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-004.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-005.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.  Every product must also have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; When you create or edit a data feed, you can set a &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Product Category&#039;&#039;&#039;. Products that have no Product Category of their own use this category in the feed, so no product is left out. This is useful when your product types do not map cleanly to a standardized category.  &#039;&#039;&#039;Every product must also have a Standardized Product Category set, or the data feed must have a Default Product Category, to be included in the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 2 - Setting Up Your Facebook Store==&lt;br /&gt;
Before you begin...&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to Facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a Facebook business page for your store (if you haven&#039;t already).&lt;br /&gt;
# Your account must have an admin page role for the Facebook business page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Facebook page must have a phone number, Privacy Policy link, and a street address.  You&#039;re able to hide your street address and it won&#039;t affect your store.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done the above, follow the step by step below.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your [https://www.facebook.com/commerce_manager/onboarding_landing Facebook Commerce Manager], review the information, and click the &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Checkout on another website&amp;quot; and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-002.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For your sales channel, choose your Facebook page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-003.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# If you already have a business suite login, choose that, or create a new Business Account.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-004.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Review and agree to the seller agreement and click &amp;quot;Finish Setup&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-005.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Your shop has now been created.  Click the &amp;quot;Add Items&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-006.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 3 - Connecting Your Data Feed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: red; font-size: 1.1em; font-weight: bold;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Please note that Facebook have made a number of changes to these pages, with some items being renamed and moved around onto different pages.. As such, the images we have included here might be slightly out of date, although the general approach remains unchanged. We recommend you refer to the official Facebook documentation in order to get the most recent updates on how to add data feeds to your Facebook Product Catalog.&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2284463181837648?id=725943027795860 About scheduled data feed uploads for catalogs]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Under &amp;quot;Catalogue&amp;quot; on the left, click &amp;quot;Data Sources&amp;quot;, and then click the &amp;quot;Add products&amp;quot; button at the top right of the page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-007.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# From the drop-down, select &amp;quot;Data Feed&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-009.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Scheduled Feed&amp;quot;, and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-010.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Go back to the &amp;quot;Product Data Feeds&amp;quot; page in your Spiffy Store, copy the URL of your feed from your store, and paste it into the &amp;quot;Data feed URL&amp;quot; field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-12.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Clear out any &amp;quot;Data feed URL login&amp;quot; details.  They are not required.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-011.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Choose the schedule that your feed should update your catalogue.  We recommend this is set to &amp;quot;Daily&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-012.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Name your data feed&lt;br /&gt;
## Make sure the currency matches the currency of your Spiffy Store&lt;br /&gt;
## When you&#039;re sure you have all of the details correct, click the &amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-013.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Facebook should start importing your products.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Importing your products may take a while, but you can safely click the &amp;quot;View Products&amp;quot; button to see the products that have been imported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 4 - Final Setup Steps==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your products are all imported, refer to Facebook&#039;s Instructions on [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/610592986219839?id=1077620002609475 Customising your Facebook store] and [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2658959294372394?id=1077620002609475 Setting up product collections in Facebook].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Guidelines for Listing Products in your Facebook Shop=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook needs the following to set up your Shop:&lt;br /&gt;
* your business email address&lt;br /&gt;
* your business phone number&lt;br /&gt;
* the Facebook business page you want to connect to your Facebook Shop&lt;br /&gt;
* the URL of your storefront Terms of Service (usually your shipping and returns policy)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every product will need the following to be accepted by Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
* A unique SKU&lt;br /&gt;
* A Standardized Product Category, or a Default Product Category set on the data feed (products with neither are excluded from the feed)&lt;br /&gt;
* The product needs to be in stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Next Steps=&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set up Shoppable Posts on Instagram]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1665120490435542 Share your products on Facebook]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10262</id>
		<title>Selling on Facebook</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10262"/>
		<updated>2026-10-12T00:21:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document the per-feed Default Product Category used for products without their own Product Category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Creating a feed of your products for Facebook allows you to show your product catalogue in your own store on your Facebook business page. This allows users to easily discover your products, share them with friends, and click through to your store to order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook has over 1 billion active users every month and is the largest social network in the world. Users spend an average of 50 minutes a day using its services. The sheer size of the network — coupled with the level of engagement by its users — makes it an ideal marketplace to promote your products and raise brand awareness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no additional cost to use Facebook Shop and it is available on all Spiffy Stores Plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a Facebook shop setup with a different ecommerce provider, you will need to remove that catalogue altogether and create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 1 - Setting Up a Product Feed in Your Store==&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to your store&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a collection that will contain all of the products you want to show on Facebook.  It can be either a Standard Collection or a Super Collection.  A Super Collection makes it easier to set up. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU and a Standardized Product Category to show up in your feed. If a product has no Product Category, set a Default Product Category on the data feed so it is still included; products with neither are excluded from the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-001.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-002.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your data feed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-003.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-004.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-005.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.  Every product must also have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; When you create or edit a data feed, you can set a &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Product Category&#039;&#039;&#039;. Products that have no Product Category of their own use this category in the feed, so no product is left out. This is useful when your product types do not map cleanly to a standardized category.  &#039;&#039;&#039;Every product must also have a Standardized Product Category set, or the data feed must have a Default Product Category, to be included in the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 2 - Setting Up Your Facebook Store==&lt;br /&gt;
Before you begin...&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to Facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a Facebook business page for your store (if you haven&#039;t already).&lt;br /&gt;
# Your account must have an admin page role for the Facebook business page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Facebook page must have a phone number, Privacy Policy link, and a street address.  You&#039;re able to hide your street address and it won&#039;t affect your store.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done the above, follow the step by step below.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your [https://www.facebook.com/commerce_manager/onboarding_landing Facebook Commerce Manager], review the information, and click the &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Checkout on another website&amp;quot; and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-002.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For your sales channel, choose your Facebook page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-003.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# If you already have a business suite login, choose that, or create a new Business Account.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-004.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Review and agree to the seller agreement and click &amp;quot;Finish Setup&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-005.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Your shop has now been created.  Click the &amp;quot;Add Items&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-006.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 3 - Connecting Your Data Feed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: red; font-size: 1.1em; font-weight: bold;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Please note that Facebook have made a number of changes to these pages, with some items being renamed and moved around onto different pages.. As such, the images we have included here might be slightly out of date, although the general approach remains unchanged. We recommend you refer to the official Facebook documentation in order to get the most recent updates on how to add data feeds to your Facebook Product Catalog.&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2284463181837648?id=725943027795860 About scheduled data feed uploads for catalogs]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Under &amp;quot;Catalogue&amp;quot; on the left, click &amp;quot;Data Sources&amp;quot;, and then click the &amp;quot;Add products&amp;quot; button at the top right of the page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-007.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# From the drop-down, select &amp;quot;Data Feed&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-009.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Scheduled Feed&amp;quot;, and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-010.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Go back to the &amp;quot;Product Data Feeds&amp;quot; page in your Spiffy Store, copy the URL of your feed from your store, and paste it into the &amp;quot;Data feed URL&amp;quot; field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-12.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Clear out any &amp;quot;Data feed URL login&amp;quot; details.  They are not required.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-011.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Choose the schedule that your feed should update your catalogue.  We recommend this is set to &amp;quot;Daily&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-012.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Name your data feed&lt;br /&gt;
## Make sure the currency matches the currency of your Spiffy Store&lt;br /&gt;
## When you&#039;re sure you have all of the details correct, click the &amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-013.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Facebook should start importing your products.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Importing your products may take a while, but you can safely click the &amp;quot;View Products&amp;quot; button to see the products that have been imported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 4 - Final Setup Steps==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your products are all imported, refer to Facebook&#039;s Instructions on [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/610592986219839?id=1077620002609475 Customising your Facebook store] and [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2658959294372394?id=1077620002609475 Setting up product collections in Facebook].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Guidelines for Listing Products in your Facebook Shop=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook needs the following to set up your Shop:&lt;br /&gt;
* your business email address&lt;br /&gt;
* your business phone number&lt;br /&gt;
* the Facebook business page you want to connect to your Facebook Shop&lt;br /&gt;
* the URL of your storefront Terms of Service (usually your shipping and returns policy)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every product will need the following to be accepted by Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
* A unique SKU&lt;br /&gt;
* A Standardized Product Category, or a Default Product Category set on the data feed (products with neither are excluded from the feed)&lt;br /&gt;
* The product needs to be in stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Next Steps=&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set up Shoppable Posts on Instagram]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1665120490435542 Share your products on Facebook]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=HELP - There are no products in my feed!=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every product must have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10261</id>
		<title>Selling on Facebook</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Selling_on_Facebook&amp;diff=10261"/>
		<updated>2026-10-11T23:04:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document that a Standardized Product Category is required for products to be included in the Facebook product feed&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Creating a feed of your products for Facebook allows you to show your product catalogue in your own store on your Facebook business page. This allows users to easily discover your products, share them with friends, and click through to your store to order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook has over 1 billion active users every month and is the largest social network in the world. Users spend an average of 50 minutes a day using its services. The sheer size of the network — coupled with the level of engagement by its users — makes it an ideal marketplace to promote your products and raise brand awareness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no additional cost to use Facebook Shop and it is available on all Spiffy Stores Plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a Facebook shop setup with a different ecommerce provider, you will need to remove that catalogue altogether and create a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 1 - Setting Up a Product Feed in Your Store==&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to your store&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a collection that will contain all of the products you want to show on Facebook.  It can be either a Standard Collection or a Super Collection.  A Super Collection makes it easier to set up. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU and a Standardized Product Category to show up in your feed. Products without a Product Category are excluded from the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-001.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-002.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Create your data feed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-003.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-004.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-005.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.  Every product must also have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.  &#039;&#039;&#039;Every product must also have a Standardized Product Category set — products without one are excluded from the feed.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 2 - Setting Up Your Facebook Store==&lt;br /&gt;
Before you begin...&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in to Facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a Facebook business page for your store (if you haven&#039;t already).&lt;br /&gt;
# Your account must have an admin page role for the Facebook business page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Facebook page must have a phone number, Privacy Policy link, and a street address.  You&#039;re able to hide your street address and it won&#039;t affect your store.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your Spiffy store must be launched and accessible (not password protected) to be able to submit your products to Facebook.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done the above, follow the step by step below.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your [https://www.facebook.com/commerce_manager/onboarding_landing Facebook Commerce Manager], review the information, and click the &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Checkout on another website&amp;quot; and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-002.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For your sales channel, choose your Facebook page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-003.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# If you already have a business suite login, choose that, or create a new Business Account.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-004.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Review and agree to the seller agreement and click &amp;quot;Finish Setup&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-005.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Your shop has now been created.  Click the &amp;quot;Add Items&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-006.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 3 - Connecting Your Data Feed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: red; font-size: 1.1em; font-weight: bold;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Note: Every product must have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Please note that Facebook have made a number of changes to these pages, with some items being renamed and moved around onto different pages.. As such, the images we have included here might be slightly out of date, although the general approach remains unchanged. We recommend you refer to the official Facebook documentation in order to get the most recent updates on how to add data feeds to your Facebook Product Catalog.&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2284463181837648?id=725943027795860 About scheduled data feed uploads for catalogs]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Under &amp;quot;Catalogue&amp;quot; on the left, click &amp;quot;Data Sources&amp;quot;, and then click the &amp;quot;Add products&amp;quot; button at the top right of the page.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-007.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# From the drop-down, select &amp;quot;Data Feed&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-009.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose &amp;quot;Scheduled Feed&amp;quot;, and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-010.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Go back to the &amp;quot;Product Data Feeds&amp;quot; page in your Spiffy Store, copy the URL of your feed from your store, and paste it into the &amp;quot;Data feed URL&amp;quot; field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sell-on-facebook-12.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Clear out any &amp;quot;Data feed URL login&amp;quot; details.  They are not required.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-011.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Choose the schedule that your feed should update your catalogue.  We recommend this is set to &amp;quot;Daily&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-012.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Name your data feed&lt;br /&gt;
## Make sure the currency matches the currency of your Spiffy Store&lt;br /&gt;
## When you&#039;re sure you have all of the details correct, click the &amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File: Commerce-manager-013.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Facebook should start importing your products.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Importing your products may take a while, but you can safely click the &amp;quot;View Products&amp;quot; button to see the products that have been imported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Part 4 - Final Setup Steps==&lt;br /&gt;
Once your products are all imported, refer to Facebook&#039;s Instructions on [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/610592986219839?id=1077620002609475 Customising your Facebook store] and [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2658959294372394?id=1077620002609475 Setting up product collections in Facebook].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Guidelines for Listing Products in your Facebook Shop=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facebook needs the following to set up your Shop:&lt;br /&gt;
* your business email address&lt;br /&gt;
* your business phone number&lt;br /&gt;
* the Facebook business page you want to connect to your Facebook Shop&lt;br /&gt;
* the URL of your storefront Terms of Service (usually your shipping and returns policy)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every product will need the following to be accepted by Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
* A unique SKU&lt;br /&gt;
* A Standardized Product Category (products without one are excluded from the feed)&lt;br /&gt;
* The product needs to be in stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Next Steps=&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set up Shoppable Posts on Instagram]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1665120490435542 Share your products on Facebook]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=HELP - There are no products in my feed!=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every product must have a unique SKU to show up in your feed.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10260</id>
		<title>Purchase Orders</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10260"/>
		<updated>2026-10-08T04:25:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document editing delivery details (expected arrival, carrier, tracking) after a purchase order is placed&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Purchase Orders let you order stock from your suppliers and receive it into one of your store&#039;s locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase Orders are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Purchase Orders overview from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; page, or from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Products&#039;&#039;&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Purchase Orders overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview lists the purchase orders in your store. Each row shows the purchase order number, supplier, destination, status, received quantity, value and expected arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can have one of the following statuses:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Draft&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order is still being prepared and can be edited or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordered&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been placed with the supplier and is awaiting stock. The delivery details can still be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Partially Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — some of the ordered stock has been received. The delivery details can still be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — all of the ordered stock has been received.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closed&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing a purchase order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a purchase order is a &#039;&#039;&#039;Draft&#039;&#039;&#039;, open it and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Purchase Order&#039;&#039;&#039; to change any of its details, including the supplier, destination, payment terms, supplier currency, exchange rate, carrier, tracking number, reference, expected arrival and note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the order has been placed, the supplier, destination, payment terms, currency and exchange rate are fixed, but you can still correct the delivery details. Open the purchase order, choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Purchase Order&#039;&#039;&#039; and update the expected arrival, carrier, tracking number, reference or note. This is useful when a delivery is delayed or the tracking number is only known after dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;Received&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Closed&#039;&#039;&#039; purchase order can no longer be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving stock ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a delivery arrives, open the purchase order and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive Stock&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the quantity received for each line and the actual unit cost invoiced for this delivery, then confirm. The stock is added to the order&#039;s destination location, and the received quantity and status are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each delivery is recorded as a separate receipt, so an order can be received in full or in part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reversing a receipt ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A receipt can be reversed if it was keyed incorrectly. On the purchase order, find the receipt in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Receipts&#039;&#039;&#039; list and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Reverse&#039;&#039;&#039;, then confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reversing a receipt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* removes the received quantity from the destination location,&lt;br /&gt;
* returns the purchase order&#039;s received quantity and status to what they were before the receipt, and&lt;br /&gt;
* restores the product&#039;s cost to the value it had before the receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Receipts cannot be edited or deleted, so a correction always leaves both the original and the reversing entry in the receipt history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can only reverse the most recent receipt for a product. If a later receipt exists for the same product, reverse that one first. A receipt also cannot be reversed if the stock it added is no longer at the location (for example, it has since been sold or moved); adjust the stock first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filtering purchase orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the search box and the filter panel on the right to narrow the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Status ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a status from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Order status&#039;&#039;&#039; list to show only orders in that state. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;All purchase orders&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the status filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a supplier name, reference or tracking number in the search box to find matching orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Custom Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add filters for a specific supplier or destination:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Custom Search&#039;&#039;&#039; panel, choose either &#039;&#039;&#039;Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the supplier or location you want to filter by.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add filter&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chosen filter is added to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list, and the list updates to show only matching orders. You can add both a supplier filter and a destination filter at the same time; the list then shows only orders that match both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a filter, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Purchase Orders per page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many purchase orders are shown on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10259</id>
		<title>Purchase Orders</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10259"/>
		<updated>2026-10-06T10:33:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document receiving stock and reversing a receipt&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Purchase Orders let you order stock from your suppliers and receive it into one of your store&#039;s locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase Orders are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Purchase Orders overview from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; page, or from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Products&#039;&#039;&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Purchase Orders overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview lists the purchase orders in your store. Each row shows the purchase order number, supplier, destination, status, received quantity, value and expected arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can have one of the following statuses:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Draft&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order is still being prepared and can be edited or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordered&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been placed with the supplier and is awaiting stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Partially Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — some of the ordered stock has been received.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — all of the ordered stock has been received.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closed&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving stock ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a delivery arrives, open the purchase order and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Receive Stock&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter the quantity received for each line and the actual unit cost invoiced for this delivery, then confirm. The stock is added to the order&#039;s destination location, and the received quantity and status are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each delivery is recorded as a separate receipt, so an order can be received in full or in part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reversing a receipt ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A receipt can be reversed if it was keyed incorrectly. On the purchase order, find the receipt in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Receipts&#039;&#039;&#039; list and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Reverse&#039;&#039;&#039;, then confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reversing a receipt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* removes the received quantity from the destination location,&lt;br /&gt;
* returns the purchase order&#039;s received quantity and status to what they were before the receipt, and&lt;br /&gt;
* restores the product&#039;s cost to the value it had before the receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Receipts cannot be edited or deleted, so a correction always leaves both the original and the reversing entry in the receipt history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can only reverse the most recent receipt for a product. If a later receipt exists for the same product, reverse that one first. A receipt also cannot be reversed if the stock it added is no longer at the location (for example, it has since been sold or moved); adjust the stock first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filtering purchase orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the search box and the filter panel on the right to narrow the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Status ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a status from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Order status&#039;&#039;&#039; list to show only orders in that state. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;All purchase orders&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the status filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a supplier name, reference or tracking number in the search box to find matching orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Custom Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add filters for a specific supplier or destination:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Custom Search&#039;&#039;&#039; panel, choose either &#039;&#039;&#039;Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the supplier or location you want to filter by.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add filter&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chosen filter is added to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list, and the list updates to show only matching orders. You can add both a supplier filter and a destination filter at the same time; the list then shows only orders that match both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a filter, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Purchase Orders per page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many purchase orders are shown on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10258</id>
		<title>Purchase Orders</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Purchase_Orders&amp;diff=10258"/>
		<updated>2026-10-06T02:57:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Create Purchase Orders article: overview, statuses, and supplier/destination custom filters&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Purchase Orders let you order stock from your suppliers and receive it into one of your store&#039;s locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase Orders are available on plans with Locations enabled. You can open the Purchase Orders overview from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Locations&#039;&#039;&#039; page, or from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Products&#039;&#039;&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Purchase Orders overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview lists the purchase orders in your store. Each row shows the purchase order number, supplier, destination, status, received quantity, value and expected arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchase order can have one of the following statuses:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Draft&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order is still being prepared and can be edited or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordered&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been placed with the supplier and is awaiting stock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Partially Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — some of the ordered stock has been received.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Received&#039;&#039;&#039; — all of the ordered stock has been received.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Closed&#039;&#039;&#039; — the order has been closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filtering purchase orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the search box and the filter panel on the right to narrow the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Status ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a status from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase Order status&#039;&#039;&#039; list to show only orders in that state. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;All purchase orders&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the status filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a supplier name, reference or tracking number in the search box to find matching orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Custom Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add filters for a specific supplier or destination:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Custom Search&#039;&#039;&#039; panel, choose either &#039;&#039;&#039;Supplier&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the supplier or location you want to filter by.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add filter&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The chosen filter is added to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list, and the list updates to show only matching orders. You can add both a supplier filter and a destination filter at the same time; the list then shows only orders that match both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a filter, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; beside it in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Current Filters&#039;&#039;&#039; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Purchase Orders per page ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many purchase orders are shown on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Product_Management&amp;diff=10257</id>
		<title>Bulk Product Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.spiffystores.com.au/kb/index.php?title=Bulk_Product_Management&amp;diff=10257"/>
		<updated>2026-10-03T23:39:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: Document new bulk Stock at Location and Unstock at Location variant actions&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;gallery heights=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Image:Bulk-product-management.jpg&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managing products one at a time can be time-consuming, particularly for larger catalogues. Spiffy Stores includes a range of bulk management tools that allow you to update multiple products or variants simultaneously, helping you maintain consistency while significantly reducing the time spent on routine administration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bulk actions are available from both the &#039;&#039;&#039;Your Products&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory&#039;&#039;&#039; pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process for using bulk actions is the same throughout the administration area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the search and filter options to display the products or variants you want to update.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the required items using the checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the appropriate action from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Bulk Actions&#039;&#039;&#039; dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter any additional information required for that action.&lt;br /&gt;
# Confirm the update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the selected products or variants are modified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Benefits of Bulk Product Management ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bulk actions provide a fast and efficient way to maintain your catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Save time&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update dozens or even hundreds of products or variants in a single operation instead of editing each item individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Reduce errors&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply the same settings consistently across multiple items, reducing manual mistakes and ensuring uniform product data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Stay organised&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep collections, tags, shipping information and fulfilment settings aligned across your catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Work more efficiently&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combine bulk actions with the product search and filtering tools to target exactly the products or variants that require updating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product Actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
Add one or more tags to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tags can be used to organise products, improve searching, assist with merchandising, or drive theme and application functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding tags:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Existing tags are preserved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Only the new tags are added.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicate tags are ignored automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
Remove one or more tags from all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ending promotional campaigns.&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing outdated classifications.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cleaning up product data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the specified tags are removed. Any other tags assigned to the products remain unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add to Collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Add the selected products to a standard collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the collection you want to use from the dropdown list, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected product is added to the chosen collection without affecting any of its existing collection memberships.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Organising seasonal or promotional products.&lt;br /&gt;
* Preparing products for a sale or marketing campaign.&lt;br /&gt;
* Grouping related products for navigation or reporting.&lt;br /&gt;
* Adding newly imported products to an existing collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Products can belong to more than one standard collection, so adding products to a collection does not remove them from any other collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove from Collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the selected products from a standard collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the collection from which the products should be removed, then confirm the bulk action. Only the selected collection membership is removed. The products themselves are not deleted, and their membership of any other collections is unaffected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing products from expired promotions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reorganising catalogue categories.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cleaning up seasonal collections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Correcting products that were assigned to the wrong collection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Shipping Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a shipping code to all selected products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping codes are used by your configured shipping rates to calculate delivery costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using this action allows you to quickly ensure that products sharing the same fulfilment requirements are charged correctly without editing each product individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Publish Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Publish the selected products, making them available to customers through your online store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Products must also be included in the appropriate collections, menus or other store navigation before customers can easily find them. Publishing a product does not automatically add it to a collection or navigation menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action is useful after:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing or creating a group of new products.&lt;br /&gt;
* Completing product descriptions, images and pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Preparing products in advance of a new range or campaign.&lt;br /&gt;
* Restoring products that were previously hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before publishing products in bulk, check that their prices, inventory settings, images, shipping details and descriptions are complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hide Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Hide the selected products from your online store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hidden products remain in your administration area and can still be edited, managed and published again later. Hiding a product does not delete its product information, variants, images or inventory records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action is useful when:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A product is temporarily unavailable.&lt;br /&gt;
* Product information needs to be reviewed or updated.&lt;br /&gt;
* A seasonal product should be removed from sale.&lt;br /&gt;
* A product is being prepared for a future release.&lt;br /&gt;
* You want to stop selling a product without permanently deleting it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, see [[Hiding and showing Products]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete Products ===&lt;br /&gt;
Permanently delete the selected products from your shop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deleting products is a destructive action and should be used carefully. Product information, variants, images and related catalogue data may no longer be available after deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before deleting products in bulk:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Confirm that the correct products have been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
* Consider hiding products instead if they may be sold again.&lt;br /&gt;
* Export or retain any product information that may be required later.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check whether the products are still referenced by collections, navigation, promotions or external links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this action for products that are no longer required and will not need to be restored. For products that are only temporarily unavailable, use &#039;&#039;&#039;Hide Products&#039;&#039;&#039; instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Variant Actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Shipping Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a shipping code to all selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipping codes are used by your configured shipping rates to calculate delivery costs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using this action allows you to quickly ensure that products sharing the same fulfilment requirements are charged correctly without editing each variant individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Location Code ===&lt;br /&gt;
Assign a warehouse or storage location code to selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location codes help staff:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Locate stock more quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Improve picking accuracy.&lt;br /&gt;
* Speed up packing and fulfilment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Weight ===&lt;br /&gt;
Update the weight of multiple variants at once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Weights are entered using your shop&#039;s configured weight unit (for example kilograms or pounds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accurate product weights help ensure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Correct shipping charges.&lt;br /&gt;
* Accurate carrier calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
* Reduced shipping discrepancies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Dimensions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the width, length and height for multiple variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintaining accurate dimensions allows shipping carriers to correctly calculate volumetric weight for larger or bulky items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps avoid incorrect shipping charges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Ship Separately ===&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the requirement for selected variants to be shipped in a separate package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable this option for products that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Cannot safely be packed with other items.&lt;br /&gt;
* Require their own shipping carton.&lt;br /&gt;
* Need special handling during transport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Set Free Shipping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable free shipping for the selected variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When free shipping is enabled, the selected variants are treated as free-shipping items when the shop calculates the available shipping rates. Other products or variants in the same order may still attract shipping charges according to your configured shipping rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Running shipping promotions on selected products or variants.&lt;br /&gt;
* Offering free delivery for specific product ranges.&lt;br /&gt;
* Applying the same free-shipping setting across all variants of a product.&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing free shipping when a promotion finishes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review your shop&#039;s shipping-rate configuration after making this change to ensure that mixed orders containing both free-shipping and normally charged items behave as expected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stock at Location ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark the selected variants as stocked at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the location from the list of enabled locations, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected variant is marked as stocked at that location, so it becomes available to the shop&#039;s order allocation and appears when the inventory list is filtered by that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only inventory-tracked variants are affected. Variants that do not track stock are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stocking a variant at a location does not change any existing stock quantities. Use the location&#039;s stock controls on the product page to adjust the quantity held there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unstock at Location ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark the selected variants as no longer stocked at a location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the location from the list, then confirm the bulk action. Each selected variant&#039;s stock record at that location is removed, so the variant no longer appears when the inventory list is filtered by that location. All locations are listed, including disabled ones, so stock can be cleared from a location that is no longer in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A variant can only be unstocked from a location when every quantity at that location is zero. Variants that still hold stock at the location are skipped, and the confirmation message reports how many variants were updated and how many were skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unstocking permanently removes the variant&#039;s stock record and its movement history at that location. If you may need that history, adjust or transfer the stock to zero first and export any records you need to keep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Further Reference ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Hiding and showing Products]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>